703
VOLUME 11 GENERAL OPERATIONS 11 2019 © TIM FORDHAM 1

11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    7

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

GENERAL OPERATIONS

11

2019 © TIM FORDHAM1

Page 2: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting

Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures

Chapter 3 – High Rise

Chapter 4 – Urban Search and Rescue

Chapter 5 – Civil Disturbances

Chapter 6 – Mass Transit System Procedures

Chapter 7 – Water Rescue

Chapter 8 – Earthquake Procedures

Chapter 9 – Environmental Emergencies

Chapter 10 – Terrorism Procedures

2019 © TIM FORDHAM2

Page 3: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11CHAPTER 1 – WILDLAND FIREFIGHTING

11.1.1-WILDLAND FIREFIGHTING 11/01/94 The first arriving Company Officer is

responsible for: (6)1. reporting initial size up to C&C and

responding units2. initiating the ICS system3. taking necessary action4. Requesting additional resources5. providing for personnel safety6. making a helispot assignment.

The safety officer has the authority to ______, _________, or terminate any activity which he may judge unsafe

alter, suspend

Who provides the safety message for the Incident Action Plan.

The Safety Officer

Company Officer's and Unit Supervisors are responsible for reporting "Holding, _____ mile out"

2019 © TIM FORDHAM3

Page 4: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111/4

When dealing with wildland fire incidents, the priorities of the LACO are: (3)

1. Protection of life2. Incident Stabilization3. Property/environment protection &

conservation

Safety Briefings: During inclement fire weather, supervisors shall conduct _______ formal safety briefings at morning line-up

daily

All single resources supervisors, personnel with assignments and operations overhead shall carry both _____ and _____ radio handie talkie radios with them

Tactical and Command

Indirect Lines: A 1 ½” progressive hoselay shall be deployed on all constructed indirect and direct Fireline over ___ or more on brush fires

300’2019 © TIM FORDHAM4

Page 5: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The IC shall assign a Safety Officer as soon as possible

Weather Reports: The ____ shall be responsible for broadcasting routine weather reports or reports when significant weather changes are predicted or anticipated.

IC

Follow up report to command and control will include the fire’s relationship to ____ lands

SRA (State Responsibility Lands)Interagency Fires: All Initial Action Zone (IAZ) and Mutual Aid fires will require the use of a common Command and ______ radio frequency

Air to Ground

Emergency Radio Traffic: When emergency radio traffic is requested, a priority of communications shall be given and “_____ “given on completion

All Clear

2019 © TIM FORDHAM5

Page 6: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Incident Management Teams will be activated:

(3)1. According to current Department policy2. If ordered by the Duty Chief3. If ordered by the Incident Management

Team I.C.

TACTICAL GUIDELINESJurisdictional or first in Captain will designate a helispot location and helispot engine company to C&C within ___ minutes of dispatch

2

The IC shall develop an _________ plan on all wildland fires that threaten inhabited areas

Evacuation

Unless there is an immediate exposure protection need, first attack on wildfires will be a ________ Operations on the fire’s flanks

Perimeter Control

2019 © TIM FORDHAM6

Page 7: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11A 1 1/2” Progressive Hose Lay will be deployed for the entire perimeter on both flanks of a wildland fire over ____ in diameter

300’

Burning Out operations shall have the approval of the _____________.

Division/Group supervisor

Backfiring operations requires the approval of the ___________ or _____

Operations Section Chief (OSC)I.C.

The _________ at the fire origin site shall ensure the area of origin is protected for cause investigation

First engine

A ___________ is required around all wildland fires

Cold Trail

I.C. shall be responsible for declaring: Knockdown, containment and control

2019 © TIM FORDHAM7

Page 8: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

RESOURCE USE When the I.C. is requesting additional

resources, the I.C. will request by Strike Team increments, or request "____________"

"Immediate need for closest engines"

Crew Responsibility: Ultimate responsibility of hand crews is to construct a __________ completely around the fire

Control line

SAFETYA minimum safety briefing will discuss: (3)

1. Fire Orders2. LCES3. Watch out Situations* In addition, personnel shall be provided

with briefing on Downhill-Indirect Line Construction when relevant to their operations

All of the above safety items are contained in the _______________

2019 © TIM FORDHAM8

Page 9: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Fireline Safety Reference, NFES 2243

All supervising personnel shall carry written copies of the: (4)

a) “Fire Orders”b) “LCES”c) “Watch Out Situations”d) “Downhill Indirect Line Construction”

__________ shall have spare copies of “Fire Orders”, “LCES”, “Watch out situations”, and “Downhill-Indirect Line Construction guidelines available

Battalion Chiefs

All Single Resource Supervisors and Operations Overhead shall obtain a briefing on the ________ plan

communications

If no safety zone exists, or the black is not a safe location, a ____________ safety zone will be created

constructed

2019 © TIM FORDHAM9

Page 10: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Fly crews will report “staged” in the air above

the fire and request an assignment from the IC. Fly crews may suggest a starting point on the line and will indicate they have a ___________

Safety Zone

The Pilot or Fly Crew Supervisor shall notify the __________ when the crew is staged in the air above the fire, and the proposed work location of the crew before the crew is position

I.C.

Fly crews will not be landed in the safety zone until approval is given by the ___

IC

The IC and Fly Crew Supervisor will discuss the proposed location to deploy the fly crew, direction of travel, safety zones, and the incident command and tactical radio frequencies.

Fly crews will not begin work until they have the following. (2)

1. An approved assignment from the IC2019 © TIM FORDHAM10

Page 11: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Received communications briefing

When the Fly Crew is deployed, the IC records crew location and working direction, on ___________________

“Brush Incident Command Worksheet”

When the Fly crew supervisor decides it is safe and necessary to construct undercut line, the decision shall be reported to the ______ for evaluation and concurrence

Immediate Supervisor

Indirect Lines: When a decision is made to construct an indirect line: What three things need to be done

a) Identify location of the indirect line. Identify a starting and stopping point for the indirect line

b) Order adequate resources to support the operation

c) Deploy a 1 1/2 Progressive Hose Lay on the indirect line

2019 © TIM FORDHAM11

Page 12: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Safety Officer: The I.C. may utilize a qualified

engine ______ or _________ as a safety OfficerCaptain, Camp Superintendent

The ________ shall record information and provide the safety message for IAP

Safety Officer

Weather Reports: C & C will contact the ________ (OCC), Riverside, to obtain weather information and any necessary forecasts

South Operations Coordination Center

The _______ or the _____ shall analyze obtained weather information

ICPlans Section Chief

COMMAND ICS Facilities: Use address, intersection,

landmark, or Thomas Bros. grid when reporting location to C&C, during ________.

follow up report2019 © TIM FORDHAM12

Page 13: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The IC may consider moving the ICP to a location that provides: (5)

1. An area away from tactical activities2. Better communications3. A safer location4. Easy access5. A better view of the incident

Fuel size up:__________ - Flashy grass fuels only,

including tall grass.__________ - Mix or grass and brush fuels,

up to 2 feet in height.__________ - Fuel of 2 feet to 6 feet in height__________ - Fuel over 6 feet in height

Grass, Light Fuel,Medium Fuel, Heavy Fuel

SRA Lands: Battalion Chief shall determine exact fire location during briefing by district Captain, and shall check the SRA map

B.C. shall report to C&C when fire is on or threatening _____ Lands. Notify FCC on the _______ report

2019 © TIM FORDHAM13

Page 14: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11SRA, follow up

If the fire will involve SRA lands, an _____ should be requested

Agency Representative

When B.C. returns command to the jurisdictional Captain, that Captain will retain command until ____________ is complete and all personnel have left the scene

demobilization

SUPERINTENDENTSThe first arriving superintendent will become _______________. The second and any additional Superintendents should be give line assignments so an assessment of tactical operations, crew safety, and fire activity can be made. Also assist IC with (IAP)

crew coordinator

Superintendents: Assist the IC with developing the IAP after they have visually reviewed the current tactical operations and fire activity.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM14

Page 15: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Group Supervisor for defensive needs should be

given a _________ or ______ designatorGeographicalstreet name

UNIFIED COMMAND Unified Command

a) Determine jurisdictional boundaries to ascertain if fire is or may soon become a multi jurisdictional fire

b) IC request C&C to notify threatened or involved jurisdiction agency and requests an Agency Representative report to command post

c) IC’s established Unified Command and co locate Command post, as situation dictates

Once Unified Command is established the IC’s will then

1. Brief each other on agency mission, objectives, priorities, limitations, and resource levels

2. IC’s establish prioritized list of incident objectives

2019 © TIM FORDHAM15

Page 16: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113. IC’s agree on strategy, appoint one OSC

and provide briefing4. IC’s develop a single IAP5. IC’s establish a single point ordering system6. IC’s stay together and jointly evaluate plan

and need to change objectives and strategy7. IC’s work together to solve problems

Who establishes a single ordering systemIC

INCIDENT ACTION PLAN Incident Action Plan

a) IC forecasts fire direction, rate of spread, threat, objectives, and resources required

b) IC refers to “Battalion Wildland Pre Attach Plans” of jurisdictions involved, to identify planning info.

c) If IC and/or Plans Section Chief are not familiar with local factors, local officers should be reassigned to Command Post, to assist planning (Operations Technical Specialist position)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM16

Page 17: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d) IC develops Incident Action Plan based on

conditions and information

If IC and/or Plans Section Chief are not familiar with local factors, __________ should be reassigned to Command Post, to assist planning

local officers

STAGING Staging: Brief Staging Manager(s):

1. Include organization2. Travel routes to all divisions3. Resource assignment method4. Establish minimum resource level at staging

Staging: Normal minimum level is ______ engine and ________

One; one crew

______ or ______ establishes staging area(s) as needed

IC or OPS

COMMUNICATIONS

2019 © TIM FORDHAM17

Page 18: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Communications - Initial Action/Mutual Aid:

Resources will be assigned a common _________ and _________. Non Mutual Aid Fires: All resources will operate on assigned tactical frequency until communications plan is announced.

Command and Air to ground radio frequency

All companies communicate with their supervisors on Tactical Frequency

The IC monitors _____ and ______ frequenciesTRO, Command

Excessive Radio Traffic: the IC will request a command frequency and will announce the communications plan through C&C

If crews are assigned to a separate tactical frequency, _________ and _____will also be assigned to that same frequency

Helicopters and dozers

A second alarm wildland fire with all units assigned and working on the incident or a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM18

Page 19: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11wildland fire incident where resource requests exceed a second alarm incident requires C&C notify the __________________.

Incident Management Team IC

TACTICAL GUIDELINESCaptain shall contact Command and Control, and announce engine and helispot location within the first ____ minutes of dispatch

2 minutes

C&C shall repeat helispot assignment over ___________ Repeater, obtain verbal acknowledgment from affected helispot engine and send _____________ to affected helispot engine

blue, MDT message

Assigned Helispot Engine:1. Acknowledge Helispot Assignment2. Verify Helispot location3. Proceed to Helispot and set up for ff4. Transmit information (via Tactical Radio)

to the pilot

2019 © TIM FORDHAM19

Page 20: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Company Officer shall transmit the following information to the pilot of the first in helicopter: (3)

1. Wind direction and velocity2. Wire hazards3. Location of other aircraft in the immediate

area and any other flight hazards

EVACUATION________ agency will implement evacuation plan

Law enforcement

Fire Department personnel may only ______ that residents evacuate their property

Recommend

I.C. requests local law enforcement agency to implement either "____________" Road Closure or "____________" Road Closure, as needed

Residents Only, Complete

2019 © TIM FORDHAM20

Page 21: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

PERIMETER CONTROL Perimeter Control: If there are structures

threatened, assign equipment to a __________ with a Group Supervisor to work on structure protection.

Structure Protection Group

If structure protection needs have been met, assign the first _________ supervisor to begin attack on the flank with the most potential for fire spread/damage

Division

______ crews should be considered for use with Structure Protection Groups.

Fire

Wind driven fires (__________ attack)1. All resources check in2. Receive assignment3. Stage in the direction of fire movement and

attempt to extinguish spot fires at the head of the fire when there are safety zones

2019 © TIM FORDHAM21

Page 22: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Offensive

STRUCTURE PROTECTION If the fire blows over, ______ the structure is

probably the safest placeinside

If structure becomes involved with fire, ____ fire fighting clothing shall be worn to fight fire

Structural

DEPLOY HOSE ___ Lateral Hose Line is primarily for spot

fires, mop up overhaul, and safety zone protection, not fire attack

1”

Water Supply: When a supply lay is used for a Progressive Hose Lay, utilize _____ hose, not ____ hose

2 ½” and 4"

Utilize roof ladder to access top of private water tanks and remove top access hatch cover of lid,

2019 © TIM FORDHAM22

Page 23: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11to prevent tank ____ during hard suction drafting operations

Implosion

APPARATUS OPERATORS When flame lengths hit a ridgetop, the flames

will generally ______ or _____ and may quadruple

Double, triple

Apparatus Operator’s ParkingBack into location if possible, park for immediate egress, and park so other equipment may pass. Apparatus shall be on opposite side of roadway away from fire, and away from chutes, chimneys, and midslope roads where fire is below location. Head lights and warnings lights shall be “on”.

Engine auxiliary pump, not main pump, should be utilized

Patrol operator shall engage __________ switch, before leaving patrol pump unattended to operate nozzle

2019 © TIM FORDHAM23

Page 24: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Automatic Pump Shutoff

BURNING OUT/FIRING OUTBurning Out/Firing Out: Notify ________ of intent to Burn Out/Fire Out. Division/Group Supervisor shall notify the ___ or ____

Division/Group Supervisor, OSC or IC

Burning Out for Immediate Defensive Need1. Identify area to burn out2. Ensure no persons are in the area to be

burned out3. Anticipate direction of spread and spotting

potential4. Ensure adequate resources are available to

handle spot fires5. Ensure adjacent resources are aware of

spread potential and are prepared for structure protection

6. Have hoseline in place around defensive need object

7. Plan and establish an escape route8. Ladder the roof, if a structure

2019 © TIM FORDHAM24

Page 25: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 119. When approaching fire is in close proximity

and in sight, begin defensive firing operation

Camp Crew Superintendent/Supervisor may perform burning out operations during line construction, using either ______ or__________

2' Method or Parallel Method (5-50')

Backfiring Operations: Request approval form the ____ or ____

OSC, IC

Backfiring Operations require a Backfiring Operations _______

Supervisor

Backfiring Operations: Notify affected personnel by tactical radio frequency and Crew Net frequency and obtain acknowledgment

MOP UPFires of ____ acres or less will be 100% mopped up with water. Fires over ___ acres in

2019 © TIM FORDHAM25

Page 26: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11size, will have wet mop up at least ____ in from the perimeter

5, 5, 50'

If decision is made to remove personnel before mop up is completed:

1. Hose will be left in place until mop up is complete.

2. Patrols or lookouts shall be assigned to monitor fire, until mop up is completed

Cold Trails: Crews shall construct cold trails around all wildland fires. If crews and dozers are canceled enroute, engine company personnel will assume responsibility for constructing ______________

Cold Trail

IC shall declare containment through command and control

____________ Supervisor shall be responsible for inspecting and declaring containment of their assigned Division

Division2019 © TIM FORDHAM26

Page 27: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

IC will request Communications Unit Leader on Campaign type fires over a ____ alarm

Second

Crew shall construct a control line around the entire perimeter of the fire

One helicopter will remain at the scene of all wildland Incidents until the I.C. determines that there is no further potential for ________ outside control lines.

spot fires

Fly crew should go available for other responses as soon as practical after _____________

knockdown

APPENDIX I Each engine in a given battalion will carry a

complete set of their entire Battalion Wildland Pre Attack Plans in their __________________

Emergency Information File

2019 © TIM FORDHAM27

Page 28: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Who carries Wildland pre attack plans for the

entire County: (3)Strike Team LeadersBattalion ChiefsAssistant Chiefs

Blue Radio: Direct Mode 2 watts/ ____ mile. Mobile Radio 40 watts/ __ - __ miles

1, 5-10

_____________: Setting fire inside a control line to consume fuel between the edge of the fire and the control line.

Burning out/Firing Out

______________: An indirect method of attack in which the fuels between the control line or natural barrier and the main fire are intentionally burned to control a rapidly spreading fire

Backfiring

______________: A period of time beginning when the fire starts and ending at 10 a.m. on the day following

2019 © TIM FORDHAM28

Page 29: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Burning period _____________: A control line completely

around the fire and any spot fires, with a high probability that these lines can be held through the next burning period

Containment

___________: There is no chance of escape once the fire is out: this is usually given when the last member leaves the fire

Control

__________: Superintendent or a Camps BC assigned to the OSC or IC, to assist in crew operations

Crew Coordinator

A fly crew is a paid crew, made up of up to ____ members, plus the Crew Supervisor

10 members

_______________: The fire is dictating the action, no containment possible

Defensive Mode2019 © TIM FORDHAM29

Page 30: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

______________: Safe, cleared, parking area for a pre designated number of fire engines with personnel in the cab (2-5engines).

Engine Safety Zone

Engine Safety Zone are identified on Bn. Wildland Pre Attack Plan Safety Maps. ESZ - is not a deployment zone

Flanks: Left (Division A); Right (Division B); Top (Division C); As viewed from point of origin towards head fire

__________: A method of suppression in which the control line is located along natural firebreaks or at a considered distance from the fire line and the intervening fuel is burned out.

Indirect Line

______________: When all open flame has been eliminated is the first report that fire is being brought under control. No visible flames on the perimeter

Knock Down

2019 © TIM FORDHAM30

Page 31: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Lateral Hose Line: 1” Hose Lay installed at a minimum of every ____ on main 1 ½” hose. Minimum of 100’ of 1”. Use for mop up, overhaul, spot fires, and safety zone protector line. Not intended as primary fire attack line.

200’

Plans Team: When requested by IC, C&C will contact the _______________ (BC), who is responsible for assigning required Plans Team Personnel.

Duty Plans Chief

IC should consider requesting a Plans Team or Short Team Support for wildland fires of working ___ alarm and larger

2nd

_____________: Safe, cleared parking area/holding area for a large number of civilian vehicles, with family members and pets inside vehicle.

Public Refuge Area

2019 © TIM FORDHAM31

Page 32: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Public Refuge Area should be staffed by at least

___ fire engine and several law enforcement units

one

___________: Areas pre-designated on Bn. Wildland Pre Attack Plans and Safety Maps, that will have high probability of civilian or fire fighter life loss

Safety Hazard Area

_________________: An area either in the burned/black area or an area void of fuel, large enough for personnel to evacuate and not have to deploy fire shelters to prevent injury. A Safety Zone is not a deployment area

Safety Zone

A Major Incident Support Team is for large scaled extended attack wildfire requiring suppression action for over a minimum of how many hours ____

24

2019 © TIM FORDHAM32

Page 33: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 If the I.C. and or Plans Section Chief is not

familiar with local factors, local officers should be reassigned to the I.C. to assist the Planning Section as a

Operations Technical Specialist

___________________: Areas within the State of California that are under contract with counties for the fire protection of State property

SRA - State Responsibility Area

The following minimum equipment shall be carried in the belt pack:

- Fire shelter- Canteen- 1 - Field Hose Clamp- 1 - 1 1/2" TEE- 1 - 1" barrel nozzle (IP)- 1 - Reducer 1 1/2" NH to 1" IP- 1 - Increaser 1" IP to 1 1/2" NH

APPENDIX II Downhill/indirect line construction in steep

terrain and fast burning fuels should be done

2019 © TIM FORDHAM33

Page 34: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11with extreme caution. ____ attack methods should be used when possible.

Direct

Downhill line construction should not be attempted when fire is present directly below the proposed starting point. A downhill line should be securely anchored at the top. Avoid underslug line if at all practical

Line firing should be done as the line progresses, beginning form the anchor point at the top. The burned out area provides a continuous safety zone for the crew and reduces the likelihood of fire crossing the line

11.1.2 WILDLAND PRE ATTACK PLAN8/1/95

Wildland Pre Attack plans are created for those Wildland interface (I Zone) areas which have potential for the loss of a large number of structures during a Wildland fire incident. Wildland Pre-Attack Plans are prepared to:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM34

Page 35: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Provide the IC with area specific

information necessary to effectively deploy resources

2. Provide incoming resources with helpful and pertinent information about the WL plan area

3. Establish logical geographic boundaries for Division or Group ICS assignments

4. Reduce necessary radio traffic during large wildland fire incidents by providing pertinent written information bout the WL pre attack plan area

Wildland Pre-Attack Plans are meant to be basic enough for first alarm resources and informative enough for _______ decision making on multi-branch, multi day incidents

Command Staff

A current set of all W.L. Pre Attack Plans shall be carried in the vehicle of each Chief Officer and _____________. A current set of all W.L. Pre Attack Plans for the Battalion shall be carried on all apparatus and equipment within the Battalion

2019 © TIM FORDHAM35

Page 36: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Camp Superintendent

An annual review of all wildland areas and Wildland Pre-Attack Plans shall be conducted during the month of _________.

March

Target areas are areas which pose a significant risk of life or structural loss as a result of a wildfire. Included are all interface areas of ___ or more structures with a minimum density of _______ structure per acre.

20, one

Wildland Pre Attack Plans are comprised of three components. They are:

Quad Map, Strip Map, Target Area Information

If the Strip Map has a target area requiring in excess of __ engines, the area will be split into segments

30

2019 © TIM FORDHAM36

Page 37: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The Plans will be filed in a W.L. Pre Attack

folder (more than 5 pre attack plans) or at the rear of the _______ file folder (5 or less pre-attack plans).

Form 78 Target Hazard

A spare copy of the jurisdictional W.L. Pre Attack Plan will be filed with the __________ left for move up companies

Emergency Information File

APPENDIX IA large Base for a major fire should be an area approximately ___ X ____ with room for over ___ firefighters

1000 x 1000, 500

Small base: An area that could suffice for one or two operational periodsWhat are the mandatory characteristics for a Small Base:

Parking (10 vehicle)Toilets Easily located

2019 © TIM FORDHAM37

Page 38: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Defensible

ESZ (ENGINE SAFETY ZONE): A location where FF's could survive being overrun by a worst-case wildfire situation. The minimum criteria is as follows:

a) Free of any flammable material or vegetation for at least ____ feet in all directions.

b) Free of heavy (Fuel Model 4) fuel for at least ____ feet in all directions.

c) Allows engines to turn around and park without blocking the road.

d) Is not located on amid-slope road or fuel break, in a chimney or saddle.

30', 200'

_____: An area requiring immediate evacuation.

Evacuation Area

_______: Structures outside the boundary of a Target Area but potentially in the path of the fire or having a direct exposure to radiant heat from the fire.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM38

Page 39: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Isolated Structure

____________: A planned area for public safe refuge within the target area where egress is marginal

Public Safe Refuge Area (PSR)

Quad Map: A portion of a Quadrangle Map which outlines the Pre Attack Plan area in relation to the surrounding area and on which sensitive areas, ICS facilities, helispots and residential assembly points are shown

_____________: A location outside the target area that can be used as an evacuation and meeting center. It is an area where residents can assemble prior to being housed at shelters. These areas are not considered shelters.

Residential Assembly Point - RAP

__________: An area where there is a high probability for firefighter casualties in a worst case fire situation; i.e., structures in a chimney, etc.

Safety Hazard Area2019 © TIM FORDHAM39

Page 40: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Segment: For wildland pre-attack plan purposes a segment is a portion of a target area. Segments are utilized when the number of engines required for defensive operations of a target area exceeds ____.

30

APPENDIX II – SYMBOL LEGENDSafe Areas:

1. (ESZ) Engine Safety Zone - a yellow diamond with number of engines that can be parked at the ESZ, inside the diamond.

2. (PSR) Public Safe Area - a yellow diamond with the letters "PSR" inside the diamond.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM40

Page 41: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Hazardous Areas:1. Target Area or Segment of Target Area

Boundary - a solid red line2. Evacuation Area Boundary - a dashed red

line3. Safety Hazard Area - shaded in pink. More

than one safety hazard area in target area - pink hexagon

4. Vulnerable Area Boundary - a solid yellow line

5. Sensitive (ecologically) Area Boundary - a dashed green line

Evacuation Route shall be identified by: Solid green shading of the street with arrowheads to indicate travel.

ICS Facilities and Residential Assembly Areas shall be identified by:

1. Incident Base - a blue circle with a "B" inside

2. Staging Area - a blue circle with an "S" inside

3. Helispot - a blue circle with an "H" inside.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM41

Page 42: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 114. RAP - a blue circle with the letters "RAP"

inside the circle.

Structure Information:1. Combustible Roof - a 3/32" diameter red

dot2. Isolated Structures - a 3/32" diameter

orange dot.

Other Information:Planned Engines – A green square with the number of engines required inside the square. Use a alpha designator also in the case of a segmented target area i.e., "20A" for 20 engines in the segment area.

APPENDIX III Every designated Wildland Pre Attack Plan

Target Area Require the following categories1. Fire Behavior2. Safety Hazard Areas3. Resource Estimate4. Access5. Evacuation Area – Coordinated with Safety

Hazard Areas

2019 © TIM FORDHAM42

Page 43: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 116. Evacuation Route7. Vulnerable Areas8. Engine Safety Zones9. ICS Facilities10. Sensitive Areas11. Structures12. Residential Assembly Point (RAP)13. Public Safe Refuge Area (PSR)

Resource Estimate: Myer's Rule: Count the number of houses on the perimeter of the target area. Divide the number of homes by ___ to identify the number of engine companies required. Add one additional strike team for _______. If the target area has combustible roofs within the interior of the target area add ___ strike teams in addition to the strike team in reserve.

4, reserve, two

Evacuation Route: This information is mandatory. List _____ safe routes of evacuation from identified problem areas that will not interfere with F.D. vehicles or emergency operations if possible.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM43

Page 44: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112

Structures in a designated area that has more than ___ wood roofs, will have a note referring to the wood roof situation

75%

11.1.3 MEDICAL EVACUATIONS ON WILDLAND INCIDENT

2/15/96Who is responsible for developing and implementing a medical evacuation plan on all wildland fire incidents?

The Incident Commander

It is the policy of this Dept. that a written medical evacuation plan be developed on any working WL fire incident

Medical Evacuation Plan should consider the following:

a) Injury typesb) Number of Ptsc) Where pts should be sent

2019 © TIM FORDHAM44

Page 45: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d) Where and how patients can be treated prior

to evacuatione) Radio frequenciesf) Resources available to the IC.

11.1.4 WILDLAND URBAN INTERFACE (WUI) PLACARD 10/10/13 The Wildland Urban Interface (WUI) Placard

(ICS Form 231), was developed by the California Wildland Fire Coordinating Group (CWCG), and adopted by FIRESCOPE for use by fire departments.

Battalion chiefs shall ensure that a minimum number of ___forms are carried on each battalion command vehicle.

25

This form shall be used on all wildland urban interface incidents when assigned to structure protection. In all cases of multiple residences, each residence shall have its own placard.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM45

Page 46: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Additional WUI Placards may be placed over

previous WUI Placards when significant changes are observed.

11.1.5 CATALINA WILDLAND PLAN10/11/13

The first arriving Company Officer shall: Report an initial size up to Los Angeles Communication Center (LACC) and responding units, initiating the Incident Command System (ICS), take necessary action, request additional resources, provide for

2019 © TIM FORDHAM46

Page 47: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11personnel safety, and make a Helispot assignment.

The first arriving Company Officer shall report on the conditions and provide them to the _______ Communication and Dispatch Center.

Avalon Sheriff’s

The Incident Commander (IC) shall be responsible for the overall management of the incident and providing follow-up reports to LACC until Department resources have been demobilized. Make direct contact with LACC regarding proposed frequencies and/or Communication Plans for Catalina Island.

Company Officers and Unit Supervisors shall report to the IC when approximately ___ mile from the incident on Catalina.

1/4

State Responsibility Area (SRA): Except within the Avalon city limits, Catalina Island is contained entirely in SRA territory. Request an agency representative from the California

2019 © TIM FORDHAM47

Page 48: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Department of Forestry and Fire Protection (CAL FIRE) be notified of the incident.

Fires originating in Los Angeles County area that threaten the City of Avalon will be managed under ______

unified command

If the City of Avalon requests mutual aid from the Department, the incident will be managed under ______

unified command

Use of Class “A” Foam: A consultation with the affected landowner shall occur prior to the use of Class “A” foam. The landowners include: Santa Catalina Island Conservancy, Santa Catalina Island Company, and the City of Avalon.

Fixed Wing Aircraft: Contract aircraft is included in the response matrix when available. Consider additional fixed wing resources on the initial response as approved by ______ or the agency representative.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM48

Page 49: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11South Ops

Use of Catalina Island Conservancy resources: When there is an immediate need for water tenders or dozers, the IC shall ensure that qualified Depart. heavy equipment operators are responded to operate Conservancy resources. Conservancy resources are identified as Conservancy Water Tender 1, 2 or 3 and Conservancy Dozer 1 and 2.

A confirmed first alarm wildland fire on Catalina Island requires LACC to notify the jurisdictional deputy chief and the _________ chief.

duty deputy

Consultation between the IC, jurisdictional deputy chief and the duty deputy chief will determine the required level of Incident Management Team that may include a “_______” or an entire Incident Management Team.

Short Team

2019 © TIM FORDHAM49

Page 50: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Each helispot is equipped with a marine deck box containing all of the materials required to operate the helispot.

City of Avalon hydrants: Inside the City of Avalon there are both fresh and salt water hydrants. The fresh water hydrants are stenciled “____” and the salt water hydrants are not stenciled.

F

All steamer hydrants in the City of Avalon have ____inch outlets, which will require a 4-1/2” female to 4” male decreaser.

4-1/2”

Use of Dozers: Consultation with the affected landowner, to include Santa Catalina Island Conservancy, Santa Catalina Island Company, or the City of Avalon is recommended prior to the use of dozers.

Catalina Island Conservancy operates a dozer year round. The operators participate in the annual CAL FIRE “fire line training” program

2019 © TIM FORDHAM50

Page 51: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11and are fire shelter trained. However, Department heavy equipment operators should be used. The Conservancy Dozer is best utilized constructing indirect fire line during initial attack.

The FS 55 Captain shall:1. Request a “Catalina Island Brush Fire

Response” that require ground resources from the mainland.

2. Request a Communications Plan from LACC.

3. Assign a helispot.a.Helispot 55-A: Request Avalon Fire

Department to set up.b. Helispot 55-B: Should only be used as a

last resort due to limited water supply.c.Helispot 55-C: Request Wrigley Center,

USC personnel to set up.4. Request Automatic Aid from Avalon Fire

Department5. Request Avalon Sheriff’s dispatch to call-

out all Patrol firefighters.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM51

Page 52: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 116. Request Avalon Sheriff’s dispatch to notify

the Catalina Conservancy of the fire and location.

7. Request Avalon Sheriff’s dispatch to control road access as necessary.

The Air Operations Chief Officer or Pilot shall: Evaluate the capability of delivering more crews via air on the initial attack. The response matrix allows for one (1) or two (2) fly crews on the first alarm assignment.

The Battalion ___Chief shall: 1. Respond to the designated command post

on Catalina Island and assume command. Travel options are as follows:

a.Respond to Helispot 53-A for air transport to incident.

b. Closest Baywatch Rescue Boat (Coast Guard, San Pedro)

c.Catalina Expressd. Coast Guard at San Pedro for

transportation2. Take the Radio Cache from the Battalion 14

office.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM52

Page 53: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113. Contact LACC and confirm all components

of the “Catalina Island. Brush Response” have been dispatched.

4. Notify Q106 to begin backfill of resources and personnel for Battalion14 coverage.

14

The Battalion ___ Chief shall respond to Catalina Freight Line barge and assume Task Force Leader position at the Freight Line for resources being transported to Catalina Island by barge

7

The Battalion ___ Chief shall respond to Battalion 14 for coverage and coordinating backfill of resources and personnel for Battalion 14.

18 The Battalion ___ Chief shall on request by the

IC and approval from the jurisdictional or Duty Deputy Chief, respond to Camp Pendleton to supervise the Hovercraft Operation. If the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM53

Page 54: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Battalion 21 Chief is unavailable, respond Battalion ___ Chief.

21, 12

The Camp Crew Coordinator shall communicate with the Camp Section _____ to facilitate the transportation of all paid camp crews on the “Catalina Island Brush Fire Response” to Catalina via initial attack aircraft or at Helispot 53-A.

Duty Chief

The Camp Section Battalion Chief shall coordinate with Air Operations, LACC, and Superintendents to facilitate the deployment of Camp Crews to Catalina Island and coordinate the deployment of three (3) Superintendents to Catalina Island via initial attack aircraft or from Helispot 53-A.

The LACC Dispatch Supervisor shall:1. With jurisdictional or Duty Deputy Chief

approval assure that one (1) Type 4 Patrol Strike Team is assembled and dispatched to

2019 © TIM FORDHAM54

Page 55: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Catalina Freight Line in Wilmington or as approved by the IC.

2. Contact the IC and determine if a Type 3 Engine Strike Team is required to respond. If the Department’s California Governor's Office of Emergency Services (OES) 1870-C is available, approval must be obtained by OES and CAL FIRE. Contact the Duty Deputy Chief

3. Ensure that the following Duty resources are notified and dispatched to Helispot 53-A for transport to incident.

a.Incident Management Team Plans Chief and Logistics Chief

b. Lifeguard Section Chiefc.Dozer Operator and Swamper

4. Request one (1) Logistics Chief to respond to LACC

Pre-Identified Engine Companies shall:1. Engine 53: Respond to Helispot 53-A and

support helispot operations.2. Engine 2, Engine 106, and Engine 236:

Respond to Helispot 53-A and drop off

2019 © TIM FORDHAM55

Page 56: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11captains and firefighters for immediate transport to Catalina Island via copter.

3. Engine 2, Engine 106, and Engine 236 engineers: Take the engines to the departing barge.

Apparatus departure locations in order of priority:

1. Catalina Freight Line2. Foss Maritime Company3. _______________ (LAST OPTION)

Camp Pendleton Hovercraft

Personnel departure locations: (Single Resource vs. STEN)

1. Helispot 53A2. Baywatch - Coast Guard Station, San

Pedro3. Catalina Express - 320 Golden Shore,

Long Beach, CA4. Coast Guard - Coast Guard Station, San

Pedro

2019 © TIM FORDHAM56

Page 57: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 If assembled the Engine Strike Teams LAC

ST 1870-C: shall respond to the designated Barge Company.

The Type 4 Patrol Strike Teams, LAC ST 1140-D, shall respond to the designated barge company.

The Heavy Equipment Section shall ensure that a single Dozer Operator and Swamper responds to Helispot 53-A for air transportation to Catalina Island. The Dozer Operator will function as a Dozer Boss for the Santa Catalina Island Conservancy Dozer operator during the initial attack.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM57

Page 58: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The Lifeguard Section Duty Chief shall: Request a move-up Baywatch Rescue Boat from the mainland to Avalon with at least one (1) paramedic, to meet Department contractual obligations for paramedic services in the City of Avalon.

CHAPTER 2 – HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

11.2.1 – HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENTS 10/01/90 Our Department’s main responsibility centers

on assessing the hazard, notification of the proper agencies, and providing the necessary interim measures to minimize the effect of a hazardous condition on people, the environment, and property

The first arriving Company is responsible for providing initial size-up, initiating the Incident Command Procedures (10.1.1), and taking the necessary action.

Who is responsible for complete assessment of the immediate hazard, providing the I.C. with technical assistance, and conducting and/or

2019 © TIM FORDHAM58

Page 59: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11coordinating measures to minimize the effect of the hazard on personnel, the environment, and property.

Hazardous Materials Squads.

The Safety Officer has the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate any activity that he may judge to be unsafe

When dealing with hazardous materials incidents the priorities of this department are: (3)

1. Protection of Life2. Protection of the environment3. Protection of property and equipment.

In no instance shall anyone travel form the Exclusion Zone to the Support Zone on a hazardous Materials incident unless they have first passed through, and been decontaminated within, a separate and distinct

Contamination Reduction Zone

2019 © TIM FORDHAM59

Page 60: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11First responders shall not enter the ___________ unless a life-threatening situation dictates a decision to effect a rescue

Exclusion Zone

Entry into Exclusion Zone: (unless immediate life loss) Entry should not be made until: (7)

1. Trained Haz Mat. Squad are present with sufficient manpower to provide entry teams of two or more with backup

2. Contamination Reduction Zone has been established

3. Site characterization has been made4. Action Plan developed5. Safety Officer has been assigned 6. PM Squad is on scene7. All support units in place

All apparatus at the scene of a suspected hazardous materials incident will be positioned for ___________ and maximum personnel safety

Immediate Egress

2019 © TIM FORDHAM60

Page 61: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

All hazardous materials incidents will be managed using ________ command

unified

The minimum participants in unified command will be representatives from LACO FD, County Health Department, and ____________.

Local Law Enforcement

The Command Post for a hazardous materials incident will be at a location which is uphill/upwind from the incident and which is large enough to accommodate the resources necessary for _________

Unified Command

The ____________ IC will assume all duties and responsibilities of the Scene Manager on all off highway incidents

Fire Department

The __________ agency will be scene manager at all on highway incidents

Law Enforcement2019 © TIM FORDHAM61

Page 62: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Who is responsible for the supervision of clean-up of all Haz. Mat. incidents.

Dept. of Health Services.

The responsibility for enforcement of hazardous waste laws falls upon: (4)

Fire DepartmentLaw EnforcementHealth ServicesDistrict Attorney

All personnel and equipment involved in a hazardous materials incident will be checked for contamination by the ________ before being released from the scene

Health Officer

The standard response to a hazardous materials incident within jurisdiction of the County of Los Angeles FD will include:

2 engine companiesHaz Mat Task ForcePM SquadBC

2019 © TIM FORDHAM62

Page 63: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Strategic Priorities: In order to meet the strategic priorities adopted by the Department, all hazardous materials incidents will be managed using a standardized tactical approach

1. Size Up2. Requesting Assistance3. Rescue4. Isolation of Material5. Evacuation6. Person Responsible7. Material Identification

2019 © TIM FORDHAM63

Page 64: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The _____ and _____ agency will be requested on all hazardous materials incidents

Health Department, Local Law Enforcement

RESCUE If the decision to effect a rescue is made by the

first arriving companies the following will apply: Command of the incident will be passed to a specific officer on assisting company or transferred to a higher ranking officer

Whenever practical, a Rescue Plan will be formulated and the Rescue Teams will be briefed. The minimum Rescue Plan should identify: (4)

1. Boundaries of the Exclusion Zone2. Location of the Safe Refuge Areas with in

the Exclusion Zone3. Location of the Contamination Reduction

Zone outside of the Exclusion Zone4. The Location of Access Control Points into

and out of these Zones

2019 © TIM FORDHAM64

Page 65: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Rescue Team Leaders will be responsible for

providing the IC with on going ______ ReportsStatus

Egress from the Exclusion Zone for all victims and Rescue Team Personnel will be through the ________ into a Contamination Reduction Zone

Access Control Points

If victims must be moved prior to the establishment of a Contamination Reduction Zone, they should be moved to a predetermined location of __________ within the Exclusion Zone where they can remain until Contamination Reduction Zone can be established.

Safe Refuge

If the initial rescue effort results in serious injury or death to first in rescue companies, no further rescue operations will be attempted until the arrival of __________

Hazardous Materials Squads

2019 © TIM FORDHAM65

Page 66: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Isolation of the Material: The I.C. should establish a basic operational area which includes an ____Zone and a ____ Zone with designated "Access Control Points" between each zone.

Exclusion, Support

The perimeter of the "Exclusion Zone" (in no case) should be less than ___feet from the leading edge of the material.

300

The _______ Zone should be large enough to accommodate the resources necessary for Unified Command

Support

Evacuation: The responsibility for evacuation usually rests with the local _______ agency

Law Enforcement

2019 © TIM FORDHAM66

Page 67: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

A separate and distinct ________ Zone should be established between the Exclusion Zone and the Support Zone whenever decontamination procedures are anticipated.

"Contamination Reduction."

IC decides to Evacuate he should plan: (4)1. Areas to be evacuated2. The priorities of the evacuation3. Access and egress routes4. Location of Evacuation Shelters

Person Responsible: The person responsible should be asked to remain at scene voluntarily. However, if necessary, the IC can instruct the representative form the local law enforcement agency to detain the person until released by the appropriate authority.

Specific identification of the materials involved is primarily the responsibility of the _________

Hazardous Materials Squad

First responder may assist in the identification of the materials in the following ways:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM67

Page 68: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a) By identifying “proper shipping name”, the

UN/NA Number, or the Hazard Class designation recorded on the shipping papers

b) By observing placards and labelsc) By requesting Hazardous Materials Safety

Data Sheetsd) By observing the types of containerse) By observing the physical state and

behavior of the materialf) By consulting with person responsibleg) By consulting with Chemtrec

Contamination Reduction: The minimum decontamination for all personnel leaving the Exclusion Zone will be a _________ flush using an 1 1/2 line on fog

60 seconds

Apparatus supplying the handling should be placed in the support zone uphill/upwind from the Contamination Reduction Zone not less than ______ feet away

100'

2019 © TIM FORDHAM68

Page 69: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Victims should be decontaminated before treatment by rescue personnel

Exception: Victims with life threatening injuries should receive immediate treatment in the Exclusion Zone if possible, and then be taken the Contamination Reduction Zone where they will be decontaminated and turned over to awaiting medical personnel

All contaminated clothing and equipment will remain in the _______ until it has been assessed by the appropriate Health Officer

Contamination Reduction Zone

Hazardous Substance Containment is primarily the responsibility of the ________

Hazardous Materials Squads

2019 © TIM FORDHAM69

Page 70: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The cleanup of a hazardous materials incident is the responsibility of _______, ________, and __________

Department of Health ServicesPrivate Clean Up CompanyPerson Responsible

The only agency with the authority to declare a Haz Mat Incident over and the incident are clean is __________

Jurisdictional Health Agency

APPENDIX I ____________: Entry and exit check points

established at the periphery of a zone to regulate the flow or personnel and equipment.

Access Control Points

What is the "Exclusion Zone?"The inner most of three areas. The Zone where contamination does or could occur

What does the Haz. Mat. term "I.D.L.H." stand for?

2019 © TIM FORDHAM70

Page 71: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

"Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health"

What are the characteristics of the "Support Zone"? (3)

1. The outermost part of the site2. Considered a non contaminated or clear area3. Support equipment is located in this Zone

and traffic is restricted to authorized personnel

What are the three elements of the IAPa) A Clear definition of objectivesb) Time Limitsc) An order sequence of events

________: Any condition that poses an immediate threat to life, or which is likely to resulting in acute or immediate severe health effects

IDLH – Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health

_________: Encompasses all of the functions and activities, every zone, and all of the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM71

Page 72: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11specialized areas required to command an incident

Operational Area

________ : A location within the Exclusion Zone which is relatively non contaminated and which can be used by reserve team personnel and victims to provide themselves with a reasonably safe holding area for initial triage and treatment

Safe Refuge

What area may also be used for staging prior to entry into the Contamination Reduction Zone

Safe Refuge

The HOT LINE is located between the __________ Zone and ___________ Zone

Exclusion Contamination Reduction

APPENDIX III For all incidents involving hazardous

substances notify: (3)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM72

Page 73: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. The County of Los Angeles Fire

Department Hazardous Materials Section, Disclosure Control Unit

2. The County of Los Angeles Health Services Environmental Protection Division

3. The local law enforcement agency

Hazardous Materials effects any of the following notify the appropriate agency

City Street City yardCounty Road Public Works – Road MaintenanceSewers Co. Sanitation DistrictStorm Drain Public Works – Flood Maintenance Division Cal Fish and GameUnderground Tanks Co. Public WorksRadiological Materials Co. Health Services – Radiation ManagementBiomedical Materials Co. Health Dept – Environmental

For all incidents requiring evacuation notify 1. The local law enforcement agency2. County of Los Angeles sheriff- Emergency

Operations Bureau (E.O.B.)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM73

Page 74: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

11.2.2 - C0 INCIDENTS7/15/98

Carbon Monoxide (CO) monitoring take place at the incident Commander's request: (3)

1. During salvage and overall operations2. At confined space and below grade

incidents3. At CO detector alarm responses

2019 © TIM FORDHAM74

Page 75: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11The California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (CAL/OSHA) permissible exposure limit to Carbon Monoxide is ____ part per million

25

Operation in an atmosphere greater then ____ requires SCBA an PPE.

25 ppm

Use ________ on all suspected or reported CO incidents, confined space and below grade incidents

SCBA/PPE

CO monitoring at Emergency Incidents: Working in teams of 2 and wearing SCBA and PPE. A secondary monitoring shall be performed where a previous reading is ____ ppm or more is found.

25

CO monitoring at Emergency Incidents: To monitor an incident scene check the entire incident perimeter first: _____ to _____ point

2019 © TIM FORDHAM75

Page 76: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Lowest, Highest

CO monitoring at Emergency Incidents: The IC shall request that Health Haz Mat to respond to the incident if: (4)

a) Anyone is showing signs of Carbon monoxide poisoning

b) Monitoring indicates a CO level of 25ppm or greater

c) The Dept. orders the premises evacuatedd) The IC feels a response by health Haz Mat

is needed

CO monitoring at Emergency Incidents: The Incident Commander shall request that the Gas Company respond to the incident if:

a) Anyone is showing signs of Carbon Monoxide Poisoning

b) Monitoring indicates a CO level of 25 ppm or greater

c) The Dept. orders the premises evacuatedd) The gas supply is shut offe) The IC feels a response by the gas company

is needed

2019 © TIM FORDHAM76

Page 77: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 CO monitoring at Emergency Incidents: The

IC shall request a Haz Mat Task Force respond to the incident if: (3)

a) Anyone is showing signs of Carbon Monoxide Poisoning

b) Monitoring indicates a CO level of a 100 ppm or greater

c) The IC feels a response by the Haz Mat Task Force is needed

Non-Emergency Operations: Carbon Monoxide Investigation, Utilize the Residential CO Inspection Checklist, Form _______ in performing CO investigations or inspections.

Form 778

Non Emergency Operations: CO monitor reading of less than 25 PPM in any occupancy:

a) Inform occupant that our instrument did not detect a potentially dangerous level of CO at this time

b) Recommend occupant check their detectorc) Attempt to reset detectord) Recommend occupant contacts the gas

company2019 © TIM FORDHAM77

Page 78: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11e) Call 911 if alarm activates again

Non Emergency Operations: If the CO reading is below 25ppm recommended to the owner to contact the _____________.

Gas Company

Non Emergency Operations: Readings of 25 ppm or more in occupancy, but less than 100 ppm: When the CO has been reduced to a safe level. The premises may be reoccupied at the discretion of the ______________

Health Haz Mat Officer

Non Emergency Operations: Readings of 25 ppm or more in occupancy, but less than 100 ppm: The _______ and _________ shall be requested to respond.

Gas Company and Health Haz Mat

Non Emergency Operations: CO level readings of a 100 ppm or more respond: (3)

Health Haz MatThe Gas CompanyHaz Mat Task Force

2019 © TIM FORDHAM78

Page 79: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Non Emergency Operations: CO level readings of a 100 ppm or more: Once the premises has been reduced to a safe level (below 25 ppm) of CO, the premises may be occupied at the discretion of the?

Health Haz Mat Officer

General Gas Monitoring Techniques: The technique used when using the Mini CO instrument traces an imaginary __________ pattern in the atmosphere and offers the best coverage pattern.

"diamond"

APPENDIX I Carbon monoxide is difficult to recognize

because it is a odorless, tasteless, colorless, non irritating gas. It is formed by the incomplete combustion of carbon based materials. The most common sources for carbon monoxide are automobile exhaust and home heating systems.

The only reliable methods to determine carbon monoxide intoxication is by measuring the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM79

Page 80: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11percentage of Carboxyhemoglobin (COHb) in the victims venous blood

Hemoglobin's affinity for carbon monoxide is about ______ times greater than its affinity for oxygen.

240

Unborn children are highly susceptible to CO exposures because their CO Hb levels are____ to ____ percent higher than the level in their mother.

10-15%

It takes ___ to ____ hours to reduce the CO Hb level 50% when the victim is moved to normal air free of carbon monoxide.

4-5

The most vulnerable target organ for low level CO exposure appears to be _______, and nerve tissues, which require high levels of oxygen

Heart

TABLE2019 © TIM FORDHAM80

Page 81: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Mild Toxicity - 1-30%, (50-400ppm) Moderate Toxicity, 30-50%, (400-1000ppm) Severe Toxicity, 50-80%, (above 1000ppm).

The following are symptoms of _______ toxicity levels: Mental confusion, headache, irritability, nausea, vomiting.

Mild

The following are symptoms of _____ toxicity levels: Sever headaches, indifferent to danger, syncope, convulsions.

Moderate

The following are symptoms of _____ toxicity levels: Collapse, shock, cyanosis, cherry red skin color, weak pulse.

Severe

A flame which does not produce CO is _____Blue

11.2.3 – HMTF AND HHMD COORDINATIONS

04/21/092019 © TIM FORDHAM81

Page 82: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_______ Situation: Involve a current or imminent discharge or release of hazardous materials, regardless of cause, that pose an immediate threat to public health and safety or the environment.

Dynamic

_______ Situation: Hazardous Materials incidents that are temporarily contained and/or controlled but may pose a threat to public health/safety or the environment and require mitigation and clean-up activities prior to a final clearance by HHMD.

Static

The ___________ of the Fire Prevention Services Bureau provides investigation, mitigation, clean-up, and enforcement capabilities under the California Health and Safety Code.

Health Haz Mat Division (HHMD)

Officers of the HHMD work in close coordination with the Department’s Hazardous

2019 © TIM FORDHAM82

Page 83: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Materials Task Forces (HMTF) to abate hazardous materials incidents by providing knowledge and expertise in risk assessment, mitigation techniques, sample collection, clean-up, and enforcement.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM83

Page 84: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Dynamic hazardous materials incidents require intervention, mitigation, and clean-up by both the HMTF and _____

HHMD

All hazardous materials incidents include an investigation as to the cause of the incident as well as a criminal investigation when suspected. Investigations are a ______ and law enforcement responsibility under the authority of the Health and Safety Code.

HHMD

The first arriving company is responsible for providing the initial size-up, initiating the Incident Command System (ICS), and taking the necessary actions appropriate for the demands of the incident which includes a __________

site characterization.

The purpose of site characterization is to identify the existence, source, nature, and extent of hazardous materials release, and to determine

2019 © TIM FORDHAM84

Page 85: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11the threat posed to human health or the environment by the release.

Both 29 CFR 1910.120 and Title 8 CCR 5192 mandate that the incident commander position be established at all hazardous materials incidents.

______ personnel are responsible for the complete assessment of the immediate hazard, providing the IC with technical assistance, and/or coordinating measures to minimize the effects of the hazard on personnel, the public, the environment, and property.

HMTF

As the “health officer” for the County, _____ officers retain the statutory authority for investigation, enforcement, clean-up, final clearance, and re-occupancy.

HHMD

The _______ is responsible for identifying and evaluating hazards, providing direction with respect to safe operations, and notifying the IC

2019 © TIM FORDHAM85

Page 86: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11of any actions taken to correct hazards at the incident scene.

Safety Officer

The Safety Officer shall coordinate with the HMTF Assistant _____ (ASO) regarding safety concerns.

Safety Officer

The Department’s strategic priorities for a hazardous materials incident in order of priority are: (3)

1. Protection of Life. 2. Protection of the environment. 3. Protection of property and equipment.

Both 29 CFR 1910.120 and Title 8 CCR 5192 mandate that the Safety Officer position be established at all hazardous materials incidents. The Safety Officer has the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate any activity that may be judged to be unsafe.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM86

Page 87: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ______ officers shall act as the only authority

for all aspects of clean-up and re-occupancy of a building or area.

HHMD

2019 © TIM FORDHAM87

Page 88: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The Department’s _____ officers are Deputy “Health Officers” and are responsible for enforcement of State hazardous materials and waste laws and regulations.

HHMD

When a hazardous materials condition is reported to CCD and the location is within the Department’s jurisdiction, CCD shall respond a full hazardous materials response, including a HMTF and two HHMD officers.

When CCD receives a mutual aid request for one or more of the Department’s HMTF, CCD responds a HMTF, a jurisdictional battalion chief, and inquires if HHMD officers are also needed.

Drums and other containers – abandoned or otherwise - Dynamic - require HMTF and HHMD:

a.Bulging drum or container. b. Leaking drum or container. c.Noise from drum or container.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM88

Page 89: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d. Flame impingement on drum or container

or fire involvement.

Drums and other containers – abandoned or otherwise - Static - may require HMTF and HHMD:

All abandoned containers require the response of the ____ for investigation, clean-up, and removal.

HHMD

Cargo - Dynamic that requires HMTF and HHMD:

a.Any time persons are adversely affected by leaks, fumes, or vapors before or during Department operations.

b. Any time an unknown product is involved.

Cargo - Static that may require HMTF and HHMD:

a.Any time remediation activities cause the potential for release of hazardous materials such as the unloading or uprighting of shifted hazardous materials cargo.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM89

Page 90: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Fires in occupancies housing hazardous materials, whether declared or not are dynamic.

Static criminal situations such as identified illegal drug laboratories and suspicious white powder responses may involve HHMD and law enforcement only.

CHAPTER 3 – HIGH RISE

11.3.1 - HIGH RISE INCIDENTS03/01/97

The first arriving Company Officer: is responsible for providing: (4)

- initial size up- ICS system start up- taking necessary action- providing for personnel safety

The I.C. is responsible for the overall Management of the incident and providing follow up reports to C&C until the F.D. resources have been demobilized

The Safety Officer shall provide the safety message for the _________

2019 © TIM FORDHAM90

Page 91: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Incident Action Plan (IAP) Company Officers are responsible for reporting

their holding position, following ______ procedures, maintaining company unity, providing safety briefings and for completing their assignments

Check In

When dealing with high rise fire incidents the priorities of this department are: (3)

1. Protection of life2. Incident stabilization through Fire control3. Property/Environmental protection &

conservation

Elevators should not be utilized for _______. Initial Investigation

Elevators should not be used as a logistics transport until deemed safe by the ____

IC

The responsibility for the use of elevators rests with the _____.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM91

Page 92: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11I.C.

Additional Alarms: When the IC is requesting additional resources at the scene of a high rise fire, the IC shall direct C&C to respond these resources to a _________ location (usually ____) and will designate a directional route of travel to that location

Check in, Base

The tactical priorities: (4)1. Investigation/Rescue/fire attack/property

conservation2. Ensure adequate Water supply 3. Gain control of building systems (Lobby

Control), (HVAC) and fire protection systems

4. Control of the floors above and below the fire

The first arriving company shall: (5)a) Radio Size upb) Investigation/initial action rescue/Fire

attackc) Water supply

2019 © TIM FORDHAM92

Page 93: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d) Pass command to the 2nd in companye) Communicate location, conditions, and

needs

The second arriving company shall: (4)a) Assume Commandb) Establish Lobby Controlc) Request and assign additional resourcesd) Support the investigation rescue/ fire attack

teams as requested

The third arriving companyWater Supply, Manpower

2019 © TIM FORDHAM93

Page 94: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The fourth arriving companyEstablish base, Manpower

Additional CompaniesManpower

The first arriving squada) Prepare for a Medical Group/Branch as

neededb) Manpower

The first arriving B.C.Assume the duties of the I.C.

The second arriving B.C.: May be assigned as a ________ Supervisor on the fire floor

Divisions

Third in Battalion chief: May be assigned as the Logistic Chief

Fourth in Battalion Chief: May be assigned as a Division Supervisor on the floor above the fire

2019 © TIM FORDHAM94

Page 95: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11First in Assistant Chief: Assume the duties of the IC. The first in Battalion chief should remain at the command post and be utilized at the discretion of the IC

Command: The first arriving officer shall pass command to the second arriving officer. When command is passed, the following information will be relayed: (4)

1. Annunciator Panel Information2. Elevator status3. The route of ascent into the building by fire

attack crews (include stairwell location and identification)

4. Any pertinent information

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Incident Command:

a. Establish a command post, b. Determine the adequacy of resourcesc. Communicate follow up and status reports

with C&C,d. Order additional resources as needed e. Gain control of the fire building systems

including standpipes, HVAC 2019 © TIM FORDHAM95

Page 96: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11f. Maintain necessary Re-Stat/Sit-Stat recordsg. Provide for ICS Positions

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Initial Investigation/Rescue/Fire Attack: (5)

a. Communicate a standard radio size up report

b. Gain entry to the Fire Control Room and/or lobby area

c. Pass command d. Check conditions on fire floors e. Take necessary actions and communicate

needs to the I.C.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM96

Page 97: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Initial Investigation/Rescue/Fire Attack. When gaining entry to the Fire Control Room and/or lobby area perform the following tasks: (4)

1. Obtain elevator keys2. Call elevator cars into Phase I (Fire Service

recall)3. Check Annunciator Panel4. Quickly ascertain any other pertinent

information. Identify and enter stairwell and begin ascent

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Initial Investigation/Rescue/Fire Attack. When investigating the fire floor check conditions ___ floors below the fire floor for a possible staging area. Check conditions on the fire floor, the floors directly _____ and ____ the reported fire floor and communicate this information to the I.C.

2, below, above

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Water Supply Operations A minimum of 2

2019 © TIM FORDHAM97

Page 98: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11engine company apparatus with engineers shall be dedicated to this operation, usually the first in company and the 3rd in company

Water supply operations at buildings utilizing Class I (dry) non cross connected standpipe systems may require additional engine company apparatus assigned to supply

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Water Supply Operations: The first in engine company engineer shall spot his apparatus within ____ feet of the F.D. standpipe connection. Only ___ hose shall be used for the hose lay between the engine company apparatus and the Fire Department connection

100, 2 1/2

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Water Supply Operations: If a hydrant is within ____ feet of the apparatus position, the engine company engineer should make every effort to secure a primary water supply from that hydrant.

1002019 © TIM FORDHAM98

Page 99: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The ______ company FFS shall assist the first in FFS. All F.D. connections should be connected to and charged

third

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Lobby Control Operations

a. Establish a Lobby Control Manager b. Maintain control of building systems c. Check In arriving personnel and maintain

ReStat records d. Maintain F.D. control of elevators e. Establish Control of HVAC Systems f. Communications with IC and land line

telephone capabilities with C&Cg. Communications with building occupantsh. Direct F.D. personnel to stairwell i. Maintain liaison with the building

engineer/security

Specific Operations, 1st Alarm Assignment Base Operations

a. Locate Base - Optimum distance _____'b. Establish Base and a Base Manager c. Initiate _______ parking

2019 © TIM FORDHAM99

Page 100: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d. Establish communication with I.C. e. ________ arriving personnel and maintain

necessary ReStat recordsf. Establish an Equipment Pool

200, diagonal, Check In

2019 © TIM FORDHAM100

Page 101: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Elevator Control: Phase 1 is when the elevator(s)is recalled to the _______ area through the use of keys or building controls

lobby

Elevator Control: Phase 2 is when _______F.D. personnel have manual control of the elevators. In Phase II, F.D. personnel control movement of men and equipment above the ground

Elevator Control: Independent Control is that which is outside of the _______ functioning of the elevators or that of F.D. control

automatic

Fire Extinguishing Systems: A Class I system is ______

A dry standpipe system without a directly connected water supply and equipped with 2 1/2 inch outlets for use by F.D. personnel

Fire Extinguishing Systems: A Class II System is _________

2019 © TIM FORDHAM101

Page 102: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11A wet standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and equipped with 1 1/2 inch outlets intended for use by the building occupants

Fire Extinguishing Systems: A Class III system is _________

A combination standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and equipped with both a hose cabinet for use by the building occupants and 2 1/2 inch outlets for use by F.D. personnel

Fire Extinguishing Systems: A Combined system is ________

A system of water piping which piping which serves 2 1/2 inch hose outlets for use by the fire department and also supplies water to fire sprinklers

Definition of a high-rise structure: Every building of any type of construction or occupancy having floors used for human occupancy located more than ____above the lowest floor level having building access.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM102

Page 103: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 1175 feet

What are the "HVAC" systems?Heating, Ventilation, Air conditioning

systems.

Lobby Control: Lobby Control directs incoming companies to the correct stairwell and maintains records of F.D. resources entering and leaving the building. Additionally, L.C. keeps alert for changes in the _______. L.C. assists in the movement of building occupants to safe areas in an orderly fashion

Enunciator/fire control room

Staging: The purpose of staging is two fold:1. Manpower/equipment to be gathered in an

area where they may be quickly assigned2. Staging can also provide for previously

assigned companies an area for rehabilitation, equipment change and first aid.

Optimum location for staging is ____ floors below the initially confirmed firefloor

2019 © TIM FORDHAM103

Page 104: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

2

11.3.2 - STRUCTURE FIRE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE

3/3/2016The first arriving company officer is responsible for:

1. Performing an initial size-up.2. Transmitting the size-up radio report to

(LACC).3. Developing an (IAP) to determine the

initial operational mode.4. Determining operational mode for initial

actions.5. Taking initial actions consistent with

operational mode, incident priorities, and tactical operations

6. Ensuring appropriate water supply can support initial actions.

7. Establishing the Incident Command System.

The incident commander (IC) is responsible for:1. Incident management.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM104

Page 105: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Determining and/or confirming the

operational mode and communicating it over the ________ and ______ Channels.

3. Determining incident objectives.4. Communicating the current operational

mode and providing status reports to LACC5. Establishing an appropriate incident

command post (ICP) with ICP support as necessary

6. Ensuring a standby (RIC) is in place for interior fire attack operations

Incident Command, Tactical

The incident safety officer is responsible for:1. Identifying and evaluating hazards, based

on the current operational mode, and advising the IC

2. Altering, suspending, or ________ any unsafe activity based on the current operational mode

3. Investigating accidents and near misses involving Department personnel.

terminating

Company officers are responsible for:2019 © TIM FORDHAM105

Page 106: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Reporting automatic holding position on

appropriate command channel.2. Performing in the appropriate ICS role

(e.g., IC, ops, division/group supervisor etc.).

3. Ensuring resources are utilizing appropriate communication plan

4. Knowing what the current operational mode is at all times

5. Ensuring an available thermal imaging camera, or equivalent equipment is used to search for victims

6. Ensuring appropriate water supply can support incident needs.

7. Maintaining company unity.8. Providing safety briefings.9. Providing status reports to the

Division/Group Supervisor, Operations Section Chief or the IC.

10. Releasing the assigned communications plan when not needed

Chief officers are responsible for:1. Performing in the role of IC, Operations

Section Chief, Branch Director, 2019 © TIM FORDHAM106

Page 107: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Division/Group Supervisor, Incident Safety Officer, or _______

2. Ensuring the communication plan is appropriate for the incident.

3. While en-route, monitoring radio traffic and providing direction via radio, as needed.

Agency Representative

2019 © TIM FORDHAM107

Page 108: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The LACC is responsible for:1. Maintaining radio communications with

the IC and ensuring all requests for resources and info are addressed.

2. Assigning radio channels to the communications plan when requested by the IC or as policy dictates

3. Starting an incident timer upon arrival of the first arriving resource on all working structure fires and making an announcement every ___ until personnel are no longer working in (IDLH) environments.

Ten minutes

Incident priorities for a structure fire are:1. Protection of life2. Incident stabilization through fire control3. _________________

Property/environment protection and conservation

Operational modes: After identifying the objectives supporting the incident priorities, the IC identifies and communicates the proper

2019 © TIM FORDHAM108

Page 109: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11operational mode through the analysis of information gathered during the size-up process and 360 building assessment. The following are the operational modes:

1. Investigation mode2. Offensive mode

_________ fire attackInterior fire attack

3. Defensive modeTransitional

Command: The management of resources at structure fires will adhere to the National Interagency Management System-ICS Operational System Description policy and the ________ California Field Operations Guide policy.

FIRESCOPE

Elevator Use:1. Elevators should not be utilized for initial

investigation and/or fire attack.2. Elevators should not be used as a logistics

transport until deemed safe by the IC.3. The responsibility for the use of elevators

2019 © TIM FORDHAM109

Page 110: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11rests with the ____

IC

Additional alarms: Requests for additional alarms from the IC shall include staging location(s) or base location, identification of the staging manager, and ______

route of travel

Size-up: Upon arrival, the first arriving officer/IC is responsible for evaluating fire conditions and providing initial radio size-up report to the LACC. Evaluation of fire conditions includes:

1. Locating the fire (attempt from an exterior location)

2. Identifying the _______3. Structure fire size up report4. 360 building assessment

flow path

2019 © TIM FORDHAM110

Page 111: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Structure fire size-up report1) Location of fire by address.2) Products of combustion (e.g., fire, light/heavy smoke, nothing showing, etc.).3) Numerical floor height and type of occupancy (e.g., two story commercial).4) _________ (e.g., exposures; location of fire; operational mode, if determined).

Special instructions

First arriving officer/IC is responsible for conducting a 360 building assessment of the structure involved. Where impractical, the IC should delegate an individual or other resource to view parts of the structure unseen by the IC

The following are guidelines for 360 building assessment:

1. Identify known or potential rescue problems.

2. Identify active and potential flow path of fire and fire gasses.

3. Identify the location and extent of fire.4. Determine the size, age, and construction

2019 © TIM FORDHAM111

Page 112: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11type of the building.

5. ____________.6. Identify other hazards (i.e., electrical,

exposures, and access).Assess structural stability

Follow up report: Based on the initial size up report, and 360 building assessment, the company or chief officer who will be assuming command is responsible for providing a radio follow up report to LACC.

1. Identify the incident with a one or two syllable geographic name (e.g., Sunset IC, BeiiiC, etc.).

2. Identify the incident command post location.

3. State other pertinent information (general situation status, additional resources, etc.).

4. _____________.5. State the check-in location and travel

routes.6. Confirm communication plan, if needed

Announce operational mode

Manage the flow path: If a flow path is visible, 2019 © TIM FORDHAM112

Page 113: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11consider closing doors and windows to limit air flow. Before closing, firefighters should rescue victims readily accessible via doors/windows

Ensure appropriate water supply to support fire flow. The first arriving engine or quint shall ensure a secure water source is established.

Cool the space from the most effective location: The primary goal in this step is to reduce the thermal threat to occupants and firefighters as soon as reasonably possible.

Change operational mode as needed: The IC shall continually assess fire conditions based on status reports and determine if a change to the operational mode is required. All operational modes and fire attack changes shall be announced over the ______ and _____ radios.

Command, tactical

Extinguish the fire: Once the thermal threats have been controlled, the fire should be extinguished.

The ____ shall ensure that a standby crew/rapid 2019 © TIM FORDHAM113

Page 114: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11intervention crew (RIC) is in place for interior fire attack operations.

IC

Rescue: A victim ______ must be made prior to initiating search and rescue operations.

survivability assessment

While protection of life is the highest incident priority, consideration should be given to suppression of the fire (e.g., exterior water application to cool the fire, rapid interior fire attack to extinguish the fire, flow path control to limit fire growth) to improve survivability of victims and firefighters.

Exposure protection: When given the assignment of exposures, the group leader shall develop an ________ to prevent the fire from extending to uninvolved buildings or other compartments within the building of origin.

exposure protection plan

Exposure Protection: OPS Chief and/or

2019 © TIM FORDHAM114

Page 115: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Group/Division Supervisor leader should consider the following:

1. Assess all sides of the involved structure.2. Assess the structural integrity to

determine the safe location for hand lines and/or master stream operations

3. Assess the potential threat to surrounding structures based on the current and expected fire behavior.

4. Coordinate tactical operations with fire attack and ventilation group.

5. Request needed resources.6. Secure needed water supply.

Coordinated Ventilation: Personnel shall control and manage the openings of the structure to limit the fire’s access to oxygen while removing smoke, heat, and steam.

Coordinated ventilation: All ventilation must be coordinated with suppression and search/rescue operations so

1. the fire is controlled and extinguished2. survivable space for viable victims is

optimized.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM115

Page 116: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11When given the assignment of ventilation, the group leader shall:

1. Determine the type of ventilation operations required to support the strategic objectives of the incident

2. Determine the needs of fire attack using face to face or radio communication. Coordinate all ventilation operations with the division/group/unit assigned to fire attack

3. Select and implement coordinated ventilation techniques to improve interior conditions for potential victims and interior crews and limit fire growth.

4. Continually assess the effectiveness of coordinated ventilation operations through observation and information received from division and group supervisors (e.g., fire attack and search).

5. Recognize the roof operations may not be assigned and/or may be discontinued.

6. Provide periodic status reports to the IC

If communication with interior suppression crews, division/group supervisor, operations

2019 © TIM FORDHAM116

Page 117: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11section chief, or IC does not exist and coordination is not possible, ventilation shall not be performed

Recognize that roof operations may not be assigned and/or may be discontinued if the following occur:1. Fire is extending through the roof and the

ability to vertically ventilate is compromised2. The IC or company officer determines risk

outweighs the benefit3. The IC has determined that the incident is in

defensive mode

Utilities: During a working structure fire, utilities shall be shut off. The utility company representatives shall be requested to respond when services have been disrupted.

_______ is the protection of buildings and their contents from unnecessary damage due to water, smoke, heat, and other elements.

Salvage

Salvage should be a concern during every phase

2019 © TIM FORDHAM117

Page 118: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11of the incident, from forcible entry to overhaul.

_______ involves searching for and extinguishing any hidden, remaining fire and making sure that the structure, its contents, and the fire area are in safe condition.

Overhaul

_______ encompasses fire cause determination and recognizing and preserving any evidence of arson.

Overhaul

The ___ shall be responsible for establishing the occupant support functions at emergency incidents.

IC

Resource allocation: Effective use of on-scene resources is required to address the incident priorities. The IC shall consider allocating resources for the following:

1. Investigation of potential risks/problems on the fire ground.

2. Establishing the ICS.2019 © TIM FORDHAM118

Page 119: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113. Rescue/fire attack/property conservation.4. Establishing standby crew/RIC5. Ensuring adequate water supply to support

fire flow. 6. Coordinated ventilation.7. Securing utilities.8. Supporting fixed fire protection systems.9. Salvage operations10. Incident command post support

Responsibilities of first-arriving company (engine, quint, or light force) resources responding on a working structure fire:

1. Position engine past structure or stop short to leave room for quint/truck.

2. Transmit radio size-up report.3. Assume command or take initial actions.

If taking initial actions, pass command to a specified fire ground officer

4. Quints arriving first at structure fires should use water supply and pumping capabilities of the apparatus until relieved.

5. Ensure appropriate water supply to support fire flow (establish a primary water source in the absence of life safety

2019 © TIM FORDHAM119

Page 120: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11concerns)

Consider a second supply on any working fire where the following conditions exist:

1. ________ structure2. Large volume of fire3. Exposure problems

Commercial

When first alarm resources take initial actions, pass command to a specified ______

fire ground officer

Responsibilities of Second-arriving company resources responding on a first alarm working structure fire:

1. Announce automatic holding location.2. Assume command, if assigned.

a.Communicate the assignment of crewmembers

b. Request and assign additional resources

3. Ensure adequate water supply to support fire flow.

4. Support the actions of assessing the fire, 2019 © TIM FORDHAM120

Page 121: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11limiting fire growth, and tactical actions

When assuming command, if assigned, communicate, by radio or face-to-face, the assignment of crewmembers to a ____________

supervising company officer

Responsibilities of additional company’s resources responding on a first alarm working structure fire:

1) Automatic holding- announce location and available ______.2) Support the actions of assessing the fire, limiting fire growth and tactical actions as assigned.

water supplyResponsibilities of First-arriving squad responding on a first alarm working structure fire:

1) Automatic holding - announce location and available water supply.2) Support the actions of assessing the fire, limiting fire growth, and tactical actions as assigned.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM121

Page 122: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113) _________________________________

Determine appropriate location for rehab and medical treatment area.

Resource deployment of first arriving chief officer shall assume the duties of IC

Resource deployment for Additional chief officers:

1) Operations Section Chief2) Division/Group Supervisor3) Incident Safety Officer4) Initial IC/BC becomes Deputy IC upon

arrival and transfer of command to next arriving or higher ranking chief officer.

5) Based on the needs and complexity of the incident, the IC role may be passed to another Chief Officer

APPENDIX I The following are guidelines for 360 building

assessment:1. Identify known or potential rescue problems.2. Identify active and potential flow path of

2019 © TIM FORDHAM122

Page 123: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11fire and fire gasses.3. Identify the location and extent of fire.4. Determine the size, age, and construction type of the building.5. Assess structural stability.6. Identify other hazards (e.g., electrical, exposures, and access).

Coordinate Attack: The effective communication between incident command, divisions, and groups, while operating on the fire ground in the designated operational mode.

Defensive Mode: Operational mode initiated when fire conditions prevent an interior attack. Attack lines and all personnel operate outside the collapse zone using defensive tactics

_________: The process of ensuring the entrance door(s) providing access to the fire area is controlled and closed as much as possible after teams enter the structure. The firefighter controls the flow path of fire conditions from the high pressure of the fire area towards the low pressure area on the other side of the door. Door control also limits fire

2019 © TIM FORDHAM123

Page 124: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11development by controlling the flow path of fresh air at the lower level of the open door towards the seat of the fire.

Door Control

2019 © TIM FORDHAM124

Page 125: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_________: The near-simultaneous ignition of most of the directly exposed combustible material in an enclosed area due to thermal radiation. This causes the fire to spread rapidly throughout the space, resulting in fire involvement of the entire compartment or enclosed space.

Flashover

_________: The movement of heat and fire gasses from the higher pressure within the fire area towards the lower pressure areas accessible via doors, window openings, and roof structures. As the heated fire gasses are moving towards the low pressure areas, the energy of the fire is pulling in additional oxygen from the low pressure areas.

Flow Path

_________: The tactic of controlling or closing ventilation points, which will:

1. Limit additional oxygen into the space thereby limiting fire development, heat release rate, and smoke

2019 © TIM FORDHAM125

Page 126: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Control the movement of the heat and

smoke conditions out of the fire area to the exterior and to other areas within the structure.

Flow Path Control

_________: A fire in which the heat release rate and fire growth are controlled by the characteristics of the fuel because adequate oxygen is available for combustion.

Fuel Limited Fire

_________: The stage of fire development when the fire has reached its peak heat release rate within a compartment. This usually occurs after flashover, resulting in floor to ceiling burning within the compartment, creating heat conditions untenable for civilians and firefighters.

Fully Developed Stage

_________: The stage of fire development when the heat release rate from an incipient fire has increased to the point where heat transferred from the fire and the combustion

2019 © TIM FORDHAM126

Page 127: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11products are pyrolyzing adjacent fuel sources. The fire begins to spread across the ceiling of the fire compartment (rollover).

Growth Stage

Horizontal Ventilation: The opening or removal of windows or doors on any floor of a fire building which will become flow paths for fire conditions

_________: The early stage of fire development where the fire's progression is limited to a fuel source and the thermal hazard is localized to the area of the burning material.

Ignition Stage

_________: A thorough assessment or investigation into the nature of the problem, type, and severity of the incident that provides the information needed to evaluate and decide on the operational mode.

Investigation Mode

_________: Fires that primarily consist of natural fiber contents, such as wood, wools, and

2019 © TIM FORDHAM127

Page 128: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11cottons. These fires have a relatively low heat release rate when compared to hydrocarbon based products.

Legacy Fire

2019 © TIM FORDHAM128

Page 129: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_________: Fires that involve hydrocarbon and synthetic based contents, such as foam rubber, nylon, rayon, and polypropylene. Modern fires have a relatively high heat release rate when compared to the natural fiber products found in legacy fires.

Modern Content Fire

Offensive mode: An operational mode that takes direct action to mitigate the problem. Attack lines are operated within the collapse zone, most often an interior attack

_________: The transformation of materials into their basic compound when subjected to heat. Contents will continue to off gas and add to the flammable fuel load within the compartment as long as the material is subjected to elevated temperatures

Pyrolysis

_________: Occurs in the growth stage when sufficient fuel, heat, and oxygen are available to allow flame spread in the upper hot gas layer inside the compartment.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM129

Page 130: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Rollover

When observed at the ceiling level, rollover shall be taken as an indicator that fire conditions are rapidly deteriorating and _______ may be imminent.

flashover

_________: The combination of airborne solid particulates, liquid particulates, and gasses emitted when a material undergoes pyrolysis or combustion. Smoke is a heated fuel source.

Smoke

Smoke is a toxic mixture that contains numerous poisonous gasses, such as carbon monoxide, hydrogen cyanide, and ________

phosgene

_________: Firefighting operation where water is applied from an exterior position to the interior of a structure to reduce the thermal threat and cool the environment just prior to initiating interior operations.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM130

Page 131: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Transitional Fire Attack

_________: The controlled and coordinated removal of heat and smoke from a structure, replacing the escaping gasses with fresh air. This exchange is bidirectional with heat and smoke exhausting at the top and air flowing in towards the fire at the bottom. The fire will pull the additional air flow into the building towards the fire which can intensify the fire conditions.

Ventilation

_________: A flashover initiated by the introduction of oxygen into a pre-heated, fuel rich (smoke filled), oxygen deficient area. Modern content fires rapidly consume more of the available oxygen within the fire area creating conditions favorable to a possible ventilation induced flashover.

Ventilation Induced Flashover

2019 © TIM FORDHAM131

Page 132: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_________: A fire in which the heat release rate and fire growth are regulated by the available oxygen within the space.

Ventilation Limited Fire

_________: The appearance of the fire building's ventilation points showing the flow paths of heat and smoke out of the structure, as well as any air movement into the structure. During the ventilation profile, assess the following:1. Building construction, integrity, size, and

occupancy type.2. Location of smoke or fire venting /from the

structure.3. The volume, velocity, density, and color of

the smoke venting from the structure to determine its current phase and potential for fire growth.

4. The direction and speed of the wind and its potential influence.

Ventilation Profile

Vertical ventilation: The vertical venting of

2019 © TIM FORDHAM132

Page 133: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11structures involving the opening of bulkhead doors, skylights, scuttles and roof cutting operations.

Victim Survivability Assessment: The evaluation of smoke and fire conditions inside the structure, structural integrity, and other fire ground conditions to determine if victims could survive on the inside of a structure.

Appendix II – UL StudiesReview the following studies on the Training Service Section's "Reference" Intranet page http://fireiis/TrainingServices/Reference.asp : if interested “SEE MANUALS”

Appendix IIIOPERATIONAL MODES OF ATTACK Operational Mode: After identifying the

objectives that support the incident priorities, the operational mode will be selected for the incident. The IC shall communicate the current operational mode to on scene resources. The IC identifies the proper operational mode through the analysis of information gathered during the size-up process to determine:

Location and extent of fire- Where is the fire burning and where is it headed? What

2019 © TIM FORDHAM133

Page 134: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11is burning?

Fire effect- Is structural integrity compromised?

Survivability of occupants- Is the interior environment of the structure survivable?

Savable property - Is there property to save?

Entry and tenability- Can firefighters access the interior?

Coordinated ventilation - Can ventilation operations be performed and coordinated?

Resources needed -Are sufficient resources available for the initial attack?

It is the responsibility of the IC to decide on the operational mode. The operational modes are:1. Investigation2. Offensive

1. ________ Fire Attack2. Interior Fire Attack

3. DefensiveTransitional

The first arriving officer has the responsibility to investigate the scene. The size up and 360

2019 © TIM FORDHAM134

Page 135: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11assessment provides the information needed to evaluate and decide on the operational mode. The investigation mode allows the company officer time to develop a plan.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM135

Page 136: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Responding companies not requested to assist with the investigation shall hold _____ out until given an assignment. While holding, companies shall locate available water supplies that may be used to support firefighting operations.

one block

During an offensive mode operation, fire conditions will allow for a transitional fire attack or an ____________

interior fire attack.

______________: The action of a hose stream being applied from the exterior to cool the interior environment of a structure fire before entering to initiate interior fire attack operations. Applying a hose stream from the exterior reduces the thermal threat and cools the interior environment.

Transitional fire attack

Offensive: Handlines are extended into the fire area to support the primary search and to

2019 © TIM FORDHAM136

Page 137: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11control the spread of the fire, while support activities, such as coordinated ventilation, and RIC are provided to support interior crews. It is imperative that company officers maintain communications with the IC and each other to provide status updates on the location of the fire, the effectiveness of coordinated ventilation operations, and the building’s integrity.

Defensive: During the defensive mode, fire conditions advance to the point where there is a danger of imminent collapse, there is little chance of saving lives or property, or there are insufficient resources on scene to safely sustain an interior fire attack. During active defensive operations, perimeter control becomes critical since firefighters are not permitted to enter the uncontrolled interior fire area.

CHAPTER 4 – URBAN SEARCH AND RESCUE

11.4.1 – CONFINE SPACE INCIDENTS1/23/14

California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (CAL/OSHA) regulates the management of a confined space incident.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM137

Page 138: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The first arriving company is responsible for providing initial size up, initiating the Incident Command procedures, and taking appropriate action.

Hazardous Materials (HazMat) personnel and Urban Search and Rescue (USAR) personnel are responsible for providing the IC with technical information, conducting and/or coordinating procedures to minimize effects of the hazards, and providing technical assistance and abilities as required to accomplish the mission objectives. They shall be trained as confined space rescue technicians.

The Department’s USAR Task Forces are staffed with a minimum of six certified confined space rescue personnel required to effect a confined space rescue. These positions include: rescue group supervisor, assistant safety officer, attendant, two entrants and an air supply manager.

The Assistant safety officer (ASO) – is responsible for the area where the confined

2019 © TIM FORDHAM138

Page 139: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11space team is working. He/she reports to the ____________

incident safety officer.

The ASO has emergency authority to prevent or stop unsafe acts that present an immediate danger to life or health. This position confers with the _____________

rescue group supervisor.

The ASO shall be a current confined space rescue technician and shall wear an appropriate “position” vest.

Only confined space rescue technicians shall make entry into permitted confined spaces.

The _______ shall be responsible for the overall operations conducted in the exclusion zone.

rescue group supervisor

The _________ shall authorize the rescue entry permit, ensure a written log is maintained, secure the operational area to prevent

2019 © TIM FORDHAM139

Page 140: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11unauthorized persons from entering, and verify that 1) atmospheric monitoring tests are performed and 2) the required equipment is used.

rescue group supervisor

The __________ is responsible for canceling the entry permit or stopping the operation if a problem or safety concern becomes apparent.

rescue group supervisor

The rescue group supervisor shall be a current confined space rescue technician and shall wear an appropriate “position” vest.

The _________ shall be responsible for operating breathing air systems for entry teams and reports rescue group supervisor

air supply manager

The _________ shall be responsible for managing the entry point and ensure that rigging is correct.

entry team manager

2019 © TIM FORDHAM140

Page 141: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11The _______ shall be responsible for the welfare of the entrants while they are in the confined space and will be the only person making contact with the entrants. The individual stationed outside the confined space, at the point of entry, who monitors and maintains communication with the entrants.

attendant

The _____ is responsible for primary entry into the confined space and conduct search and rescue for the victim(s).

entrant(s)

The backup entrant(s) shall be responsible for emergency assistance to the entrants in the confined space. Backup entrant(s) may assist the attendant with rigging, atmospheric monitoring, and scene set-up as long as it will not interfere with being able to immediately act as a backup.

All sworn personnel will have a minimum ____ hours of confined space awareness training.

four2019 © TIM FORDHAM141

Page 142: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The strategic priorities of this Department in dealing with confined space incidents in order of importance are:1. Protection of life.2. Protection of the environment.3. ________________

Protection of property and equipment.All confined spaces shall be considered Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) until positively proven otherwise for the following conditions in the order given:1. Oxygen content.2. ______________.3. Potential toxic air contaminants.

Flammable gases and vapors

Only personnel who have completed the Los Angeles County Fire Department's Confined Space Rescue Technician course shall make entry or function in designated confined space positions.

Personnel may also obtain this training by completing the California State Fire Marshal

2019 © TIM FORDHAM142

Page 143: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Confined Space Rescue Technician course. Upon completion of the class, personnel must attend a Los Angeles County Fire Department 16-hour Confined Space “cross-over” class to be certified with the Department. Personnel shall request this class through the ____________

Department USAR Coordinator.

Space Rescue Technician course. All certified personnel who wish to remain certified shall complete the mandated annual continuing education as specified by CAL-OSHA Title 8.

The testing of the atmosphere shall be done prior to entry, continued throughout entry, and a written record maintained and kept on site until the incident is completed.

When the space is entered from a top opening (a depth of 5 feet or greater), the following requirements shall apply:A. A Class 3 harness shall be worn.B. A hoisting system shall be in place and

attached for lifting personnel out of the confined space.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM143

Page 144: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11C. Fall arrest precautions shall be

implemented whenever personnel could fall from their work area.

The primary form of communication will be a hard wire communication system, then hand held radio as an alternative

The command post for a confined space incident will be located out of the immediate operational area and yet within line of sight to the area.

Who should determine the appropriate command post and staging locations and have FCCF relay the information.

first arriving officer

Name the six phases of a Confine Space Incident

1. Phase 1: Scene PreparationStep One: AssessmentStep Two: Staffing and EquipmentStep Three: Make the operational area

safe2. Phase 2: Entry Preparation

2019 © TIM FORDHAM144

Page 145: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113. Phase 3: Atmospheric Monitoring4. Phase 4: Entry5. Phase 5: Victim Removal6. Phase 6: Termination

2019 © TIM FORDHAM145

Page 146: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

P ha se 1 : S c e n e Pre p a rati on : Step One: Assessment: Size-up: An initial

size-up of the incident.a.Locate and secure the job site foreman or a

reliable witness.b. Determine the location and number of

victims.c.Obtain blueprints, maps or have on-site

personnel draw a sketch of the site.d. Determine the mechanisms of entrapment

or nature of illness.e.Make a decision as to whether this is a

"rescue” or “recovery”.f. Determine number of entry points and

locations.g. Start an Incident Command Worksheet for

a confined space incident.h. Recognition and identification of known

and potential hazards.

Exclusion zone should be identified and isolated by the use of yellow fire line tape, rope, or other suitable barrier. A ___-foot perimeter is preferred for an exclusion zone and may

2019 © TIM FORDHAM146

Page 147: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11expand depending on the incident.

50

The support zone shall be identified by the use of fire line tape to a ____-foot perimeter beyond the exclusion zone.

100

The support zone will contain within its boundaries: the incident command post (ICP), medical group, equipment cache, air supply vehicle, rehab, support personnel, and additional personnel and equipment.

Step Two: Staffing and Equipment: A Confined Space Rescue Team can consist of the following positions: Rescue Group Supervisor, Entry Team Manager, Attendant, ASO – Confined Space, Air Supply Manager, and four Entrants (two for primary entry and two for back-up). Note: The exception would be a space only large enough for one rescuer. In this case, the confined space rescue team shall consist of a minimum of: rescue group supervisor, attendant, primary entrant(s), and

2019 © TIM FORDHAM147

Page 148: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11backup entrant(s).

Ensure one basic life support (BLS) ambulance and/or an air squad is assigned, adequate air supply with battalion air cache and/or mobile air utility, ensure a rehab area is established along with staffing by a medical unit.

Step Three: Make the operational area safe. The primary hazard to consider in a confined space is the potential for a hazardous or oxygen-deficient atmosphere.

All confined spaces shall be considered ______ until positively proven otherwise with an appropriate atmospheric direct reading instrument.

IDLH

P ha se 2 : E n try P re pa rati o n: Ensure lock-out, tag-out, and blank-out

procedures are complete.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM148

Page 149: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a.All fixed mechanical devices and equipment

capable of causing injury shall be placed in a zero mechanical state (ZMS).

b. All electrical equipment, excluding lighting, shall be locked out in the open (off) position with a key-type padlock.

c.All hydraulic lines or feed lines must be disconnected and blanked or blinded, locked, and tagged.

d. The key shall remain with the ________.ASO

In cases where lock-out is not possible, equipment shall be properly tagged and physical security provided. This would mean a firefighter will stand guard until the rescue has been completed.

All locked-out utilities shall be locked with a key-type padlock and tagged with a _______

confined space lock-out tag

Ensure that only confined space rescue technicians enter the actual space, and that they are equipped with respiratory protection that is

2019 © TIM FORDHAM149

Page 150: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11best suited for that particular incident or task: either SCBA and/or SABA. At no time shall a SCBA be removed from a confined space rescue technician’s back to make entry into a confined space.

No team member shall enter a confined space with any electronic device unless approved by the IC, rescue group supervisor and the ______. The approval will be based on atmospheric monitoring.

ASO

Every entrant of each entry team shall be equipped with the following items:

a.A minimum of three light sources of intrinsically safe lighting.

b. Proper protective equipment as deemed necessary by the Incident Commander. At the very least, each Entry Team member shall wear Nomex brush coat and pants, or Nomex jumpsuit, boots, gloves, and a confined space-type helmet. In a possible flammable atmosphere, a Nomex hood shall be worn. Goggles may be needed for eye

2019 © TIM FORDHAM150

Page 151: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11protection when SCBA or SABA is not worn.

c.Every Entrant shall wear a Class 3 harness. A retrieval line attached to the "D" ring between the shoulders on the harness.

P ha se 3 : A t mo s phe r i c Mo n it o r i n g Atmospheric monitoring shall occur prior to and during all entries into a confined space. All atmospheres shall be tested in the following order:

a.Oxygen content.b. Flammable gases and vapors.c.Potential ____________

toxic air contaminants

The following levels shall be considered as IDLH:

a.Oxygen deficiency < ___%b. Oxygen enrichment > 23.5%c.Flammability at 10% of Lower Explosive

Limit.d. Toxicity shall be any limit whose

numerical value exceeds the permissible

2019 © TIM FORDHAM151

Page 152: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11exposure limit in accordance with State regulations

19.5

All atmospheric readings shall be recorded on the Rescue Entry Permit and the _______

Attendant's Worksheet

P ha se 4 : E n try Prior to entry, each team member shall be logged on the rescue entry permit with their time of entry. This function shall be assigned to the ______, who shall keep the rescue group supervisor apprised of the status of the team via the entry team manager.

attendant

General guidelines recommend that entry teams be limited to ___minutes in most spaces.

30

Upon removal from the space, each team shall immediately report to _____

Rehab.2019 © TIM FORDHAM152

Page 153: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11P ha se 5 : V ictim R e mo v a l

P ha se 6 : T e r m i na ti o n Have a responsible party (i.e., law

enforcement, OSHA, or FD) seal entry points to ensure no additional entry.

All confined space rescue entry permits, forms, etc., shall be sent to the Department’s _________ for filing per Cal- OSHA regulations.

Technical Operations Section

Definitions ______________ an individual assigned to

operate the air supply manifold system and manage the air supply area. This individual manages the ventilation team, line tenders, mobile air unit operator and logs air supplies of personnel entering a space. This position shall be filled with a current confined space rescue technician.

Air Supply Manager

2019 © TIM FORDHAM153

Page 154: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 _________ is an individual stationed outside the

confined space, at the point of entry, who monitors and maintains communication with the entrants. This position shall be filled with a current confined space rescue technician.

Attendant

___________: The absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a solid plate that completely covers the bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond the plate.

Blanking and Blinding

Confined Space: As defined by Title 8, must consist of all three of the following:

A. Is large enough and so configured that a person can enter and perform work.

B. Has limited or restricted means for entry/exit (i.e., tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, etc.)

C. Is not designed for continuous occupancy.

Confined Space Awareness Level: Sworn personnel who have attended the Los Angeles

2019 © TIM FORDHAM154

Page 155: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11County Fire Department's ____ hour "First Responder" course in Confined Space Entry and Rescue. Note: Awareness level personnel are prohibited from entering any permit-required confined space for any reason.

four

Confine Space Rescue Team: Sworn personnel who have successfully completed the Los Angeles County Fire Department's Confined Space Rescue Technician course (or California State Fire Marshal Confined Space Rescue Technician course with Department Confined Space Rescue Technician “cross- over” class). The Confined Space Rescue Technician shall maintain Continuing Education (CE) as mandated by CAL-OSHA.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM155

Page 156: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Confined Space, Permit Required: As defined by Title 8, must meet the definition of a confined space and have one or more of the following characteristics:

a) Contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.

b) Contains material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant.

c) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section.

d) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.

Entry Permit: A permit required for entry into a confined space. Entry cannot be made until the confined space entry permit has been completed and approved. The entry permit should cover confined space preparation, personal protective equipment, safety devices, atmospheric monitoring tests, and required procedures.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM156

Page 157: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Hazardous Atmosphere: An atmosphere that

may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:

a) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of its lower explosive limit (LEL).

b) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LEL. A concentration in which visibility is obscured at a distance of five feet or less is a general rule.

Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH): Any condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a confined space.

Line Tenders: Consist of a minimum of ___ personnel, (i.e. an engine company), and will tend air lines and communication cables under the direction of the air supply manager. They may also assist in the setup of the air supply

2019 © TIM FORDHAM157

Page 158: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11area and obtain air bottles from units on scene.

four

Litter Team: Consists of four personnel, (i.e., an engine company), and will be used for the transportation of the victim from the exit point to the Medical Group Treatment Area. The litter team reports to the _________. At no time should they come within ten feet of the space until signaled by the entry team manager.

entry team manager

Lower Explosive Limit: The lower limit of the flammability range of a gas or vapor at ordinary ambient temperatures expressed in percent of the gas or vapor in air by volume.

Oxygen Depleted: An atmosphere that contains less than 19.5% oxygen (Normal air contains approx. 21% oxygen).

Oxygen Enriched: Any air concentration that contains greater than 23.5% oxygen.

Rescue Group Supervisor: Shall be 2019 © TIM FORDHAM158

Page 159: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11responsible for the overall operations conducted in the operational area. Authorizes the Rescue Entry Permit and ensures that a written log is maintained. This position shall be filled with a current confined space rescue technician.

Entry Team Manager: Shall be responsible for managing the entry point and assuring that rigging is correct. This position shall be filled with a current confined space rescue technician.

Rigging Team: Constructs the rope rescue systems to facilitate the insertion and retrieval of personnel and or victim(s). Reports to the entry team manager or attendant, if necessary.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM159

Page 160: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

11.4.2 – CANINE SEARCH POLICY6/19/14

Canine Search Team (CST): A highly-trained search team consisting of a search canine and handler. Must be Department endorsed and certified by the Department of Homeland Security/Federal Emergency Management Agency (DHS/FEMA) National Disaster Search Canine Readiness Evaluation Process every ______ years.

three (3)

Canine Search Strike Team: Shall consist of two CST and a qualified search team manager. The ______ of the Emergency Operations shall

be responsible for approval of selected CST/Canine Search Team In Training (CST-IT).

chief deputy

The _______ of Emergency Operations are responsible for approval of all releases for

2019 © TIM FORDHAM160

Page 161: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11CST/CST-IT from regularly assigned work locations.

deputy chiefs

The battalion chief of the Technical Operations Section is responsible for:

a.The management of the CST/CST-IT program.

b. Processing releases for travel/training associated with CST/CST-IT activities

c.Approval and processing of all allowable reimbursement requests related to CST operations. Feeding, Veterinarian care, and required training costs are the responsibility of the Department.

d. Approval for the use of Depart. vehicles for transportation within LA County related to the CST Program

e.Facilitating required approvals for the use of Department vehicles outside of Los Angeles County related to the CST Program

The ____________ shall be responsible for approving the use of an appropriate Department vehicle for transporting a CST to approved

2019 © TIM FORDHAM161

Page 162: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11training sites within Los Angeles County jurisdiction or to an incident.

jurisdictional battalion chief

The administrative site supervisor shall ensure that all personnel are aware of the needs of the canine and provide for its safety and well- being.

Department CST/CST-IT handlers shall be responsible for:

1. The control, training, record keeping, and well-being of their assigned search canine both on and off duty.

2. Maintaining qualification as a handler in accordance with the licensing or certifying agency.

3. Ensuring that all required certifications, licenses, and vaccinations for the search canine are maintained.

4. Establishing and maintaining a CST/CST-IT file at both the handler’s administrative site and the _______

Technical Operations Section.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM162

Page 163: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 This file must contain the following items:

1. Alternate canine care provider information should the handler be unable to provide care for any reason.

2. Phone number and contact procedure for the emergency contact person shall be maintained at the program manager’s site file, handler’s work location, dog run, and with the canine portable enclosure.

Department CST/CST-IT handlers shall be responsible for:1. Notifying both the battalion chief of the

__________ and the canine coordinator, whenever the CST is not available for emergency response.

2. Providing notification to the handler's on-duty admin. site supervisor if the CST is deployed while off duty.

Technical Operations Section

When a need for additional canine search specialists is identified interested candidates shall submit a letter of interest to the _________________

2019 © TIM FORDHAM163

Page 164: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Department search canine coordinator

The Department will recognize and endorse a maximum of _______ CSTs. The Department may also approve up to two (2) CST-ITs to be certified CSTs.

fourteen (14)

CST/CST-IT canines must be recognized and certified by the DHS/FEMA National Disaster Search Canine Readiness Evaluation Process prior to deploying on an assignment as one of the Department’s CSTs.

CST-IT may be removed from the CST program by the battalion chief of the Technical Operations Section after ____ failures of the DHS/FEMA test

two

CST certification shall be evaluated every _____ years according to the DHS/FEMA National Disaster Search Canine Readiness Evaluation process.

three (3)2019 © TIM FORDHAM164

Page 165: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

CST/CST-IT canines shall not accompany their handler during routine daily duties and assignments away from the administrative site without the specific approval from the _____________

jurisdictional battalion chief

Requests for releases shall be coordinated through the ________

Technical Operations Section.

CST handlers will be permitted _____ release up to six (6) hours from duty per month for sanctioned canine training. CST-IT will be permitted ______ releases up to six (6) hours from duty per month for sanctioned canine training.

one (1), two (2)

Travel training requests shall be initiated through the _________ and approved through channels by the North Region Operations deputy chief, for training conducted outside of Los Angeles County.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM165

Page 166: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Technical Operations Section

The canine Department vehicle shall only be used with approval from the battalion chief of the ________

Technical Operations Section

Approved Department CST/CST-IT training will be compensated, if approved by the battalion chief of the ______ as mandatory training.

Technical Operations Section

Incident Response: Los Angeles Command and Control (LACC) shall page all CST handlers, the battalion chief of the Technical Operations Section, the canine coordinator, and USAR coordinator for any CST-related requests, responses, or incidents.

CSTs shall be assigned to the incident based on the shortest ETA, as determined by the Technical Operations battalion chief, USAR coordinator, canine coordinator, or their subordinates.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM166

Page 167: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11If a CST is requested by Department resources assign two (2) CSTs with the shortest ETA to the incident. A qualified search team manager may be added if warranted.

If a CST is requested by a resource other than the Department, outside of Los Angeles County, in Region 1, or by the California Governor’s Office of Emergency Service (Cal-OES):1) CCBC shall obtain approval from the duty

chief prior to dispatching the CST.2) Once approved, the CCBC shall assign a

Canine Search Strike Team (consisting of two (2) CSTs with the shortest ETA and a qualified Search Team manager).

3) A Department agency representative may be added if warranted.

4) These requests shall comply with the Department policy for mutual aid and assistance by hire.

If requested for incident response by LACC while on-duty, the CST handler shall immediately notify their immediate supervisor,

2019 © TIM FORDHAM167

Page 168: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11who shall notify the jurisdictional battalion chief. If requested for incident response by LACC while off-duty, the CST handler shall advise his/her administrative site to ensure proper coverage or backfill of the handler’s position.

Upon arrival at an assigned incident, the decision to use the canine shall be made by the incident commander (IC) with the approval of the _________

canine handler.

The canine handler is responsible for the safety and proper use of the CST at all times. The handler will evaluate the scene and advise the IC of any specific requirements to make the scene safe and workable for the CST.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM168

Page 169: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Requests for CST demonstrations for public relations purposes shall be coordinated through the canine coordinator and the appropriate regional operations bureau community services representative. Such events shall be scheduled a minimum of ______ days in advance.

thirty (30)

CST members will be compensated while off-duty for approved Department-sanctioned public relations demonstrations. Movement of the demonstration equipment shall be coordinated by the CST handler when approved by the Technical Operations Section.

All veterinary care invoices or receipts shall be received by the Technical Operations Section within ____ business days of the appointment from the CST/CST-IT handlers.

ten (10)

Search canine fit for duty physicals shall be performed annually by a veterinarian that has been approved by the Department. All

2019 © TIM FORDHAM169

Page 170: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11veterinarian physical documentation shall be sent to the __________

Technical Operations Section

11.4.3 – CANINE ARSON TEAM (CAT)3/15/03

________: A specially trained handler and canine, certified as an Accelerant Detection Canine, that has been recognized and approved by the Department

Canine Arson Team (CAT)

Who is responsible for the management of the department’s Canine Arsons Team program.

The Special Unit Section I Battalion Chief of the Fire Prevention Division

The department will recognize and authorized a maximum of_____ canine arson teams. The Department may also approve up to ___ canines in training to be certified as an Arson Canine. A maximum of ___ canine per administrative site per shift shall be allowed.

3, 2, 12019 © TIM FORDHAM170

Page 171: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

All Department approved canines shall be confined in an appropriate kennel or leashed while on the grounds of the fire station or other administrative site, if they are subject to contact with the public

Application by qualified Canine Arson Teams for assignment to the Department's Canine Arson Team Program shall be through channels to the ____________

Prevention Bureau Deputy Chief

Department approval of current Canine Arson Teams shall be renewed _____, at the request of the canine handler, during the month of _____

annually, July

The ________ where the canine team is assigned shall journalize any and all information related to the canine team

Administrative Site Supervisor

2019 © TIM FORDHAM171

Page 172: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The ________ may authorize the use of a

Department vehicle, such as a suburban, sedan utility or other appropriate Department vehicle, for transporting a Canine Arson Team to an incident or approved training

jurisdictional Battalion Chief

While on duty, the handler is responsible to provide for an emergency contact person to pick up and care for the canine if necessary. The phone number and contact procedure for the emergency contact person shall be maintained at the_______ or _________, at the handlers assigned work location and with the canine portable enclosure or kennel

Section, Unit Administrative site office

Any aggressive behavior displayed by the canine shall the reported to whom? (4)

HandlerSite supervisorJurisdictional Battalion ChiefSpecial Units I Battalion Chief

2019 © TIM FORDHAM172

Page 173: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 When Command and Control receives a request

for a Department Canine Arson Team from a Department Incident Commander, another agency in the Region or State OES, Command and Control shall page the _______________ and ____________

Special Units I Battalion ChiefFire Investigation Unit Captain

The CCBC shall assign the Canine Arson Team at the direction of the ______________. If the request is from another agency, a Department Arson/Fire Investigator shall be assigned to the incident.

Fire Investigation Unit Captain

If the request is from an agency outside LA County, the CCBC shall obtain approval from the ______

Duty Chief

When a Canine Arson Team handler is notified of a request for their specialty and is available to accept that assignment while on duty, the handler shall immediately notify their

2019 © TIM FORDHAM173

Page 174: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11immediate supervisor, who will notify the _____________

Special Units I Battalion Chief

After checking in at the assigned location or incident and receiving an assignment briefing, the canine handler shall contact his ____________. The site supervisor shall notify the _____________

Administrative site supervisorjurisdictional Battalion Chief

When an off duty Canine Arson Team handler receives an request and accepts the assignment, the handler shall advise his/her administrative site to ensure coverage

Upon arrival at the assigned incident, the decision to use the canine shall be made by the ____________ with the approval of the canine handler.

Lead Investigator

2019 © TIM FORDHAM174

Page 175: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The lead investigator is responsible for the

scene and the investigation. The canine handler shall be subordinate to the __________.

Lead Investigator

All travel, training, and activities of Canine Arson Teams must be pre approved by the ________ for cost reimbursement.

Special Units I Battalion Chief

Request for arson canine demonstrations for public relations purposes shall go through the __________, to the Special Units I Battalion Chief

Regional Operations Bureau Community Relations Office

Travel/Training and releases will go through the _____________

Special Units I Battalion Chief

11.4.4 – RESCUE AIR CUSHION PROCEDURES 3/30/07

2019 © TIM FORDHAM175

Page 176: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The Department has established Rescue Air

Cushion (RAC) Task Forces, strategically located across the County to provide timely response to each Regional Operations Bureau.

Each Rescue Air Cushion Task Force is equipped with a Rescue Air Cushion rated for a ___ foot or 10-story fall, with inflation fans and related equipment. The Rescue Air Cushion should not be used for heights exceeding ____ feet.

100, 100

Incident Commanders are responsible for evaluating the most appropriate use and strategic positioning of Rescue Air Cushions at urban high angle emergencies and “jumper” incidents, consulting as necessary with Rescue Air Cushion Task Force and _________.

Law Enforcement

Incident Priorities: The priorities of this Department in dealing with “jumper” type incidents in order of importance are:

1. Protection of life.2019 © TIM FORDHAM176

Page 177: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Protection of property and _______

equipment

One Rescue Air Cushion Task Force shall be dispatched on all first alarm “Jumper” response matrix, when a subject is reported to be threatening to jump from a tower, overpass, bridge, multi-story building, power pole, etc.

A “Jumper” response matrix shall include the following resources on the First Alarm:

1 Engine1 Truck or Quint (closest)1 Rescue Air Cushion Task Force (1 Engine, 1 Truck/Quint/Engine, 1 Rescue Air Cushion trailer)1 Squad1 Battalion Chief1 USAR

2019 © TIM FORDHAM177

Page 178: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

A Rescue Air Cushion Task Force consists of a trailer with a cart containing a rescue air cushion with inflation fans, and an Engine(s), Quint or Truck with a total staffing of _____.

seven

When the “jumper” is a potential suicide victim, a unified command shall be established with the jurisdictional _________ agency.

law enforcement

The jurisdictional law enforcement agency shall be responsible for communicating with the “jumper” and working with the Fire Department to mitigate the emergency.

Rescue Air Cushion is 20 feet wide by ____ feet long.

24

Initial Action1. Request Law Enforcement and set up

Unified Command2. Assign Safety Officer

2019 © TIM FORDHAM178

Page 179: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 113. Identify area to deploy the Rescue Air

Cushion4. Suicidal “jumper” consult with law

enforcement5. Establish LCES6. Ensure personnel working above ground

level are wearing appropriate harnesses

Set up the Rescue Air Cushion in a selected “pre-deployment area”. DO NOT set up (inflate) the Rescue Air Cushion in the target area! To a possible “jumper” above, the Air Rescue Cushion may appear to be fully inflated when it is not.

For possibly suicidal “jumper” situations, the “pre-deployment area” should be out of sight of the individual, so he or she does not visualize the preparations being made.

Position Assignments for Deployment of Rescue Air Cushion:

First-in Company Officer or Battalion ChiefIncident CommanderLiaison with law enforcement

2019 © TIM FORDHAM179

Page 180: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Rescue Task Force Captain

Safety Officer for the overall operation (He/she is most knowledgeable on operation)Supervises deployment of air cushion Controls timing of jumper(s)

Rescue Task Force Firefighter SpecialistResponsible for primary (on-board generator) and secondary (fixed electrical) power sources for the electric blowers

Rescue Task Force FirefighterAssists in moving air cushion to target areaAssists in deployment of air cushions

Engine Company CaptainInspects target area for hazards that can

damage the air cushionInsures Rescue Air Cushion is fully inflated. Coordinates crowd control with Law

Enforcement.Engine Firefighter Specialist

Assists Task Force Engineer in the deployment of electric blowers to target area.

Engine Firefighter

2019 © TIM FORDHAM180

Page 181: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Assists in deployment of air cushion to

target area.Truck/Quint Company Captain

Assists Engine Company Captain to ensure that target area is inspected for hazardsEnsures Rescue Air Cushion is fully

inflated. Coordinates crowd control with Law

Enforcement. Truck/Quint Company Firefighter Specialist

Ensures primary and secondary power has been obtained.

Truck/Quint FirefighterAssists in deployment of air cushion to

target areaTruck/Quint Firefighter

Assists in deployment of air cushion to target area

SquadSquad Firefighter #1

Standby at target area for immediate patient care

Squad Firefighter #2

2019 © TIM FORDHAM181

Page 182: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Standby at target area for immediate patient

care

As a last resort, a portable gasoline powered blowers can be used to inflate the Air Rescue Cushion

The Air Rescue Cushion will fully inflate in less than ____ seconds.

60

If it becomes necessary for victims to jump, they should be instructed to fall as if they were sitting down with arms stretched out in front of body.

If two people must jump at the same time they should interlock arms at the elbows and jump at the same time.

After landing, have the jumper(s) immediately roll off the cushion and allow ___ seconds for re-inflation.

30

2019 © TIM FORDHAM182

Page 183: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Always have ______ member assigned to

ensure the flaps on the exhaust breathers are tucked into the opening between jumps.

Rescue Air Cushion task force

The white flaps on the exhaust breather ports on each side must be pushed back inside the rescue air cushion between jumps.

The cushion is constructed of vinyl-reinforced fabric, which is fire resistant and waterproof. The tear strength of this material is over ___ pounds psi.

50 The rescue air cushion shall be inflated _____

and inspected for damage and/or wear.monthly

Damaged cushions shall be removed from service and sent to the manufacturer for repair. A reserve unit shall be requested from the __________.

East Operations Bureau Office

2019 © TIM FORDHAM183

Page 184: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11CHAPTER 5 – CIVIL DISTURBANCES

11.5.1 - CIVIL DISTURBANCE EMERGENCY - GENERAL 1/01/93 When operating during conditions of civil

disturbance, the priorities of this Dept. are: (2)1. Protection of life2. Protection of property & equipment

TACTICAL ALERTTactical Alert is composed of three phases. Phase I and/or Phase II do not have to take place prior to phase III

Phase I – is the Planning PhasePhase II – is the Mobilization PhasePhase III – is implemented when a civil disturbance is in progress

______________: Tactical Alert is the planning phase and is established when law enforcement or fire Dept. intelligence or an anticipated event may result in a civil disturbance incident. No deployment takes place

Phase I2019 © TIM FORDHAM184

Page 185: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

____________: Tactical Alert is the mobilization phase and deploys resources to fire stations in the tactical alert area

Phase II

The Task Forces will be composed of a minimum of _____ units to a maximum of_____ units plus a ______

3, 5, Battalion Chief

Fire Task Forces will be assembled at fire station's in the tactical alert area and will be composed of __________ or _____________

Three engines and a B.C. 3 engines, truck and a B.C.

Fire Task Forces shall remain intact throughout phase _____ and phase ____alerts

II & III

__________: will be assembled at each paramedic squad staffed station in the Tactical Alert Area

Medical Task Force 2019 © TIM FORDHAM185

Page 186: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Medical Task Force will be composed of:1 engine, 1 squad, 1 ambulance

Medical Task Forces shall remain intact for ______ emergencies and ______ follow up throughout Phase II and Phase III alerts

Rescue, hospital

B.C. chiefs will be deployed to respond with _______, but not with _________

Fire Task Force, Medical Task force All units assigned to Task Forces shall be

staffed with _____ personnel as soon as possible

4

Command and control shall notify all Battalion headquarters of the Phase II or Phase III Tactical Alert. Battalion HQ Capt. Shall immediately provide the info concerning the Phase II or Phase III Tactical alert to their assign Administrative sites

2019 © TIM FORDHAM186

Page 187: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 What Tactical Alert is implemented when a

civil disturbance is in progressPhase III Tactical Alert

Strike Teams: (5 engines with a chief officer) may be staged and predesignated locations and may be responded as a strike team or adjusted to a _____ configuration with a minimum of __ engines and a B.C. as directed by the I.C.

Fire Task Forces, Three

Department ECC shall be activated during what stage of a Tactical Alert.

Phase III Tactical Alert

During what phase shall an Incident Action Plan be put into effect

Phase III Tactical Alert

Phase III Tactical Alert - Command and Control shall place all units on _____ and provide an "All Call" to all Chief Officers

Radio standby

2019 © TIM FORDHAM187

Page 188: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11LAW ENFORCEMENT Law enforcement protection during "Tactical

Alert". Phase __ Tactical Alert may require law enforcement security/escort protection

Phase II

Law enforcement Protection During "Tactical Alert": Phase III tactical alert shall require law enforcement security/escort protection for each individual _______, _______, or _________

Task Force, Medical Task Force, Strike Team

Request for extraction shall be made by officers through Command and Control, identifying the location, existing on scene conditions, and units involved.

Fire units will not attempt to enter areas that law enforcement feels are ____ due to the level of violence within that area, until that area has been "____" bylaw enforcement. This does not prohibit fire and law enforcement from making

2019 © TIM FORDHAM188

Page 189: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a _____ decision to enter a "hot" area incases of life exposure or other high priority missions

HOT, CLEARED, Mutual

Security/Escort Missions will be provided by a minimum of two, _____ person cars (or a minimum of ____ motor officers) for each deployed fire task force, Medical task force, or strike team

2, 4

Once assigned, law enforcement units shall continue to provide security/escorts protection for the duration of the tactical alert

Priority for law enforcement security/escort deployment will be: (4)

1. Jurisdictional Law enforcement agency2. Sheriffs Department3. California Highway Patrol4. National Guard

Fire Department officers shall request through Command and Control an ______ by law enforcement personnel if they determine that

2019 © TIM FORDHAM189

Page 190: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11there is a threat to their personnel and there is an immediate need to disengage from an area

extraction

Law enforcement assets generally will not be sufficient to escort fire units from their ________ to staging areas

Fire Stations

Phase II and Phase III Tactical Alert Activities outside of quarters shall be restricted to emergency response

Units in single engine stations in the affected alert area shall be moved by command and control at the direction of B.C. to _____ or _____ companies shall be added to single unit

Multi company Stations, Move up companies

Task forces shall be commanded by a _____. A Medical Task Force shall be commanded by the _________

B.C.; Engine Company Captain

2019 © TIM FORDHAM190

Page 191: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Minimum Response: All incidents shall have a

minimum response of a Task Force during a Phase III Tactical Alert. During periods of transitional staffing the minimum response shall be _____units

2

Radio Designations: When Medical Task Force(s) are implemented during a Phase II and III the radio designation of the assigned engine company shall be used to identify the Medical Task Force

Medical Task Force 16

When Task Force are implemented during Phase II and III radio designations shall be the radio designation of the _______ assigned to the Fire Task Force

B.C. ie. Fire Task Force Bn 13B (BC number plus shift)

With the declaration of a Phase II or Phase III Tactical Alert, Command and Control shall request the jurisdictional law enforcement

2019 © TIM FORDHAM191

Page 192: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11agency to provide security/escort personnel for fire resources in the affected area

“________” may be established in Phase II or Phase III Tactical Alert as determined by the Command and Control Battalion Chief in coordination with jurisdictional battalion chiefs and Incident Commanders

Area Command

2019 © TIM FORDHAM192

Page 193: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

When Phase III Tactical Alert will extend beyond ___ hours, consideration shall be given for rehabilitation and/or relief of personnel.

12

Phase II or Phase III Tactical Alert structure fires and other emergency incidents shall not be named

During Phase II and Phase III Tactical Alerts Division and Branch Chief Officers shall provide a hourly update to the _________

Operations Section Chief

Hospital follow up: Medical Task Force units going to and returning from hospital follow-ups shall remain intact and keep their command informed of their status

Mutual Aid Strike Teams assisting the L.A. Co F.D. and operating in the tactical alert areas shall be assigned a unit or a member with departmental blue, white, or OES frequency radios to ensure interagency radio Bird Dog communication

2019 © TIM FORDHAM193

Page 194: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Requests for immediate Jurisdictional Law Enforcement “______” response should be made when assistance by law enforcement is required at the scene to protect or control the situation

Code L

If there is an immediate need for personnel to leave the scene due to a threat to the safety of personnel, a request for law enforcement “________” shall be made through Command and Control

Extraction

Phase III Tactical Alert: A ____ or ____ operational approach shall be utilized whereby no member or unit works alone at an emergency

"team" "buddy"

Use of breathing apparatus should typically be reserved for ______ or small fires that can be quickly extinguished

rescue operations

2019 © TIM FORDHAM194

Page 195: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Fire suppression actions should be ______with

an emphasis on quick knock down and the protection of exposures through the use of ______ and limited _____ streams

defensive, deck guns, hand line

Fire fighting tactics should be altered to a _________ mode with heavy streams to optimize use of resources

"Hit and Run"

Fire Fighting personnel shall _____ be placed above ground on ______ ladders or during elevated stream ops.

Not, aerial platforms

________ and ______ may withdrawal from any emergency situation which poses a threat to their safety

Officers and Personnel

Body Armor shall be put on prior to leaving the station or staging area. Body armor shall be worn under your turnout coat in a manner that it will not be seen

2019 © TIM FORDHAM195

Page 196: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Law Enforcement Security/Escort shall be provided during Phase III and may be provided during Phase II Tactical Alerts through the jurisdictional law enforcement agency

Ladder Trucks without __________ shall not be utilized in civil disturbance Tactical alert areas

enclosed tiller Cabs

During ________ Tactical Alert units shall consider alternate response routes. Units shall respond under red light and siren to and from incidents. Discontinuing the use of red lights and siren on responses is authorized where such use would cause unwanted attention or impact public safety

Phase III

Securing tools and equipment shall be relocated in compartments and no apparatus shall be left unattended. _________ Apparatus should be removed as soon as possible from any station required to be evacuated

Reserve2019 © TIM FORDHAM196

Page 197: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Fire station security during a response:1. Doors and windows locked2. Windows coverings closed3. Lights left on4. Fuel pumps off5. Court yards shall be closed and locked

Station Evacuation - In addition to windows closed, lights left on, fuel pumps off, and court yards closed and locked the following shall be done:

1. Electric power shut off2. Remove Safety clothing3. Notify jurisdictional law enforcement for

security for the site

Radio Standby shall be instituted by Command and Control and maintained in Phase ____ Tactical Alert

III

All Bn Headquarters sites shall be notified of the reporting locations of relief personnel whose administrative sites are located within a Tactical Alert Area by ______ hours by E mail

2019 © TIM FORDHAM197

Page 198: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111800

During Phase III Tactical Alert, personnel may phone any battalion headquarters to determine their reporting location after ________

2000 At No Time will the Dept tolerate of condone

on duty members carrying firearms or bringing them on to departments sites

2019 © TIM FORDHAM198

Page 199: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

APPENDIX I Assigning of emergency incident dispatching,

unit assignment, and resource deployment to local jurisdictional Chief Officers is known as _________

Area Command

Extraction: A FD request for immediate protection and escort removal by law enforcement units of resources whose safety is threatened due to a civil disturbance. A request for an extraction by FD units is a first priority response by law enforcement

Tactical Alert is divided into three Phases representing ______ (Phase I), _______ (Phase II), _______ (Phase III)

Planning, Mobilization, Incident Operations

11.5.2-PERSONNEL SAFETY DURING CIVIL DISTURBANCES 7/01/93

2019 © TIM FORDHAM199

Page 200: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 When operating during conditions of civil

disturbances, the priorities of this department are: (2)

Protection of LifeProtection of Property and Equipment

Protection in Quarters: (6)1. Maintain Station Security2. Relocate Personnel3. Keep Radio and Body Armor at Hand4. Consider Apparatus Placement5. Treat all threats as real6. If an attack occurs: Request Command and

Control for law enforcement "Extraction"

During Phase ___ tactical Alert Units shall respond under red lights and siren to and from incidents in the civil disturbances area

III

Personnel shall wear the fire helmet and brush jacket on all EMS responses and full turnouts going to and from other emergencies. Body armor shall be worn under safety clothing

2019 © TIM FORDHAM200

Page 201: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Individuals shall not approach or enter the

structure alone

A “____” or “______” operational approach shall be utilized where by no member or unit operates or works alone at an emergency

Team, Buddy

Apartment and Hotel Safety Procedures. When using elevators, do not go to the designated floor if the call is of a violent nature. Consider going to the _________ the incident and using the stairs for the remaining distance

floor below

2019 © TIM FORDHAM201

Page 202: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11CHAPTER 6 – MASS TRANSIT SYSTEM PROCEDURES

11.6.1 METRO BLUE LINE INCIDENTS4/1/97

The grade crossings are automatically activated when the train is about ____ feet from a crossing. The time between warning device activation and train arrival is approximately ___ seconds

500’, 20

Passenger Stations: There are 22 passenger stations along the Metro Blue Line route. ____ of which are within the jurisdiction of the LA CO FD.

5

A dry standpipe system consisting of a double 2 1/2” fire department connection, located at ground level, and a single _____ fire hose valve located at platform level.

2 1/2”

Communications with the Metro Rail's Central Control Facility is possible by pushing the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM202

Page 203: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11button at the ___________________. The panel is set on a timer and will last ___ minutes and is for emergency assistance

Emergency Assistance Panel, 3

The __________ has an illuminated blue light and a red security box. The light only indicates the location of the box not whether the power is on or off

Emergency Trip Station

Trains on the Metro Blue Line are powered by ____ volts distributed to the cars by the Overhead Catenary System

750

Traction Power Substations (TPSS) can be located by the __________ on the roof of the structure.

Blue Light

Emergency Trip Station (ETS), located at TPSS, when activated immediately de energizes that substation and the ____________________________

2019 © TIM FORDHAM203

Page 204: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Adjacent substation in either direction

The Central Control Facility can completely remove power in a specific area quickly through remote control of all ______________

Traction Power Substations

Traction Power Substations should be considered __________ at all times

energized

Emergency Trip Stations are located at Traction Power Substations and identified by a ____ light, which is visible above the roof of the TPSS structure

blue

2019 © TIM FORDHAM204

Page 205: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The ________ at Central Control Facility must be notified by using the telephone in the ETS whenever power is taken down and the emergency stop button is pushed

Train Controllers

The Overhead Catenary System (OCS) contains what four independent components:

1. Messenger Wire (Supports and energizes the contact wire)

2. Hanger (Provide spacing between the messenger and contact wires)

3. Contact Wire (Power to the train is accomplished through contact between the pantograph and contact wire)

4. Catenary Pole (Constant tension is made by sliding weights within catenary poles)

The ______ is an articulating electric power collection device fixed atop the metro car

Pantograph

The height of the overhead centenary system varies from 18 to 22 feet.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM205

Page 206: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 What is the seating capacity

200

Braking distance, non emergency, at 55 mph to full stop is within ____ ft

750

The maximum speed is _____ mph55

There are ____ sliding doors on each side of the light rail car. The interior Emergency Door Releases are located over each set of passenger doors. Doors may be opened by pulling down on the red “__” handle

4, T

There are ___ emergency door releases on the exterior of each car:

2

Emergency door releases are located on the right front side of both “A” and “B” ends of each car just below the operator’s cab. The panel is normally opened by a metro car

2019 © TIM FORDHAM206

Page 207: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11operator’s key. Emergency personnel may open this panel without key by using a ________

pen or pencil

Windows: All exterior windows are made of polycarbonate (Lexan) materials. Entry through these windows may be gained by using a _____ saw (with carbide tip blade) or by removing the weather stripping.

Rotary

The Pantograph is extended under 22 lbs of spring tension and can be lowered electronically from the operator's cab or manually via pump. The pump is located under the _____ forward facing seat (left hand side) or cars "A" section.

second The batteries are nickel cadmium located under

the cars right side behind the skirting on the “B” end. The battery supplies the interior lighting system, doors and the unit for raising and lowering the _______

Pantograph2019 © TIM FORDHAM207

Page 208: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

11.6.2 – METROLINK PROCEDURES10/15/98

The Metrolink rail service is owned by the Southern California Regional Rail Authority and is operated under contract by ______.

Amtrak

Diesel Electric Locomotives: They are equipped with a 3000 horsepower turbo charged engine that drives the main generator which converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. The 600 volts of DC provided by the generator drive the traction motors

Each Locomotive is equipped with a secondary diesel electric system referred to as the Head Power Unit (HEP). This system provides hotel power.

The (HEP) system produces 480 volts AC to both right and left sides of passenger cars. Electrical controls for this system are located in the ___ of the locomotive and control area of the cab car

2019 © TIM FORDHAM208

Page 209: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11cab

Air Brake and Electrical Safety hazards: The exterior area between the joined locomotives and/or the passenger cars is where ___ PSI air brake service hoses and ___ volt electrical power jumper cables are located. DO NOT REMOVE OR ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THESE CABLES

140, 480

Only trained ________ members can safely de-energize Head End Power and remove or install power cables

Metrolink crew

If an electrical hazard does not exist, do not shut down the diesel engine of either the locomotive or the Head End Power Unit. Train electrical power will provide lighting and power for electrical door operation, making evacuation easier

Access to the cab areas is achieved through the cab doors or cab windows

2019 © TIM FORDHAM209

Page 210: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Fuel spills are a serious hazard and diesel

engines must be shut down as soon as possible by Metrolink crew members. In emergency situations this may be accomplished by depressing either of the “________” located above the fuel tank

Engine Fuel Cut Off Switches

Metrolink trains normally consist of one locomotive coupled with ___ to ___ bi level commuter cars. The bi level commuter cars are present in two different configurations, a trailer car and a cab car.

3, 7

From the exterior of the train the cab car may be identified by: (2)

1. The letter “F” near the engineer’s window2. The presence of the 5 chime air horn and

the headlights located above the end door

Occupant load: The seating capacity is 146 occupants for the trailer car and 134 occupants for the cab car. The maximum occupant

2019 © TIM FORDHAM210

Page 211: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11capacity (“crush load”) is ___ passengers per car.

360

Electrical service is supplied with ___ volts AC via the head end power unit of the locomotive.

480

The exterior hazards to emergency personnel are the _____ and the area between the coupled cars and/or locomotives. These areas contain the 140 psi air brake service hoses and the 480 volt, head end poser jumper cables.

nickel cadmium batteries

Access to Bi Level Commuter Cars: There are three routes for access and egress of the Bi Level commuter cars:

End doorsSide doorsWindows

End Doors: Trailer car end doors open from the exterior by means of a simple lever type door latch. From the interior, it is necessary to

2019 © TIM FORDHAM211

Page 212: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11release a safety latch to enable the door lever to function

Side Doors: During emergency operations side doors may be operated by locating the emergency door release, located at each door either outside or inside. To make access break the Lexan cover plate and pull the _______.

red ring

Side Doors: In order to open the other half of the door, then manual control valve which is located behind the steel panel adjacent to the door access must be actuated to release the pneumatic control

Each Bi Level commuter car has ___interior emergency exit windows. Four on the upper level and four on the lower level on each side of the car.

16

All windows in the commuter cars are constructed of _____. Interior emergency exit

2019 © TIM FORDHAM212

Page 213: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11windows are identified by a _______ at the window molding.

Lexan Polycarbonate, red ring

There are five exterior emergency windows on side of car, three on the upper level and two on the lower level. Identification of the exterior windows is made by the _______ in the molding strip.

Split

Electrical Hazard: Breaching the walls or roof of the cars is ___ an option due to the double wall construction and 480 volt cable routing inside the car.

not

All Bi level commuter cars are equipped with a fire extinguisher and emergency tools consisting of: (4)

Hand saw, two mallets, an axe, pry bar

2019 © TIM FORDHAM213

Page 214: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The ________ is the most accurate means to

relay the actual incident location to the railroad and other responding agencies

milepost reference

Milepost references: Generally a post with a number placard. Mileage references may also be obtained from placards attached to ______, _______, and ______

Signals, crossing gates, signal houses

_______: There is one other means of identifying a section of railroad and that is by the name of the immediate block the incident is located. Railroads are broken into sections known as blocks.

Block Signs

Reporting: In addition to following Department standard reporting formats personnel should also report the: (3)

a) Milepost numberb) Access routesc) Type of train

2019 © TIM FORDHAM214

Page 215: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Notifications shall be made through Command and Control as soon as possible and should include the following information: (5)

a) Name of the home railroadb) Mile Marker or street namec) Type of incidentd) Type of requeste) Estimated duration time

CHAPTER 7 – WATER RESCUE

11.7.1 WATER RESCUE INCIDENTS12/1/94

Under the County of Los Angeles Multi-Hazard Functional Plan for Emergency Operations, the Fire Department is given primary responsibility for _____________ operations in the event of flooding, dam failure, and tsunamis.

Search and Rescue

The Incident Commander is responsible for:1. Providing initial size up, initiating the IC

Procedures

2019 © TIM FORDHAM215

Page 216: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Requesting response of additional personnel

and equipment for search and rescue operations as needed

3. Taking necessary action to prevent life loss in a manner consistent with this instruction and Depart. Policy

4. The overall coordination of multi agencies and emergency operations

5. The assignment of additional units to downstream strategic positions in accordance with waterway rescue preplans and as conditions dictate

Who is responsible for the recovery of dead bodies and searches in mountainous, remote and designated areas (with requested assistance provided by the Fire Department?)

The Sheriff's Department

Who has overall responsibility for a blue water incident?

The Coast Guard "SRU" (Search and Rescue Unit)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM216

Page 217: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Strategic priorities: When dealing with water rescue incidents the priorities of this Department are listed below: (4)

1. Protection of Life2. Effecting rescue and assistance to survivors3. Provide notification and assistance to other

divisions and/or agencies4. Scene Control as required to isolate non-

emergency personnel not involved in the rescue.

SAFETY Entering the water: Personnel shall conduct

rescue operations from the shore, helicopter, or a boat, whenever possible. When obvious hazards exist firefighters shall not enter the water except as a last resort to save lives

Hazardous Operations: Under no circumstances are lives to be risked for the purpose of ___________, ______________ operations, or any other activity not essential for protection of life.

body recovery, sandbagging2019 © TIM FORDHAM217

Page 218: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Downstream Safety: A _____________ Position shall be established at all sites for the protection of rescuers and victims.

Downstream Safety

________________: An upstream safety/lookout position shall be established at all swift water rescue sites to warn of dangerous debris in the water which might strike rescuers and victims.

Upstream Safety/Lookout

Tactical Priorities: Surf Rescue: (4)1. Support lifeguards, U.S. Coast Guard or

Harbor Patrol if at scene2. Search for victim from shore, utilizing air

squads, Coast Guard, and boats as necessary. In water searches left to the discretion of personnel at scene

3. Attempt rescue if necessary4. Provide medical aid

Tactical Priorities: Lakes, Reservoirs, etc.: (4)1. Support Lifeguards, if at scene

2019 © TIM FORDHAM218

Page 219: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Search for victim from shore, utilizing air

squads and boats as necessary3. Attempt rescue if necessary4. Provide medical aid

Tactical Priorities: Swiftwater/FloodRescue: (5)

1. Initial Size Up2. Initial Action Plan:

a. Request sufficient equipmentb. Search for victim(s)c. Attempt rescue

3. Provide medical aid4. Termination of operations5. Demobilization

2019 © TIM FORDHAM219

Page 220: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Tactical Priorities: Blue Water Rescue (Incidents on the Open Water)

1. The first arriving company shall assume I.C. and initiate site assessment, which may include identifying the incident location

2. Provide effective lighting. Units should not activate blue lights until arriving on scene

3. Initiate the retrieval of survivors from the water onto rescue boats and floating platforms. As necessary, deploy rescue swimmers and flotation for rescue

4. Triage and medical aid5. Transportation of survivors to shore side6. Fire suppression as needed7. Preservation of wreckage as needed.

Blue lights are standard marine signal lights to identify the incident

Standard Response-Rescues in Lakes, Reservoirs, Etc.

1 Engine Company1 Paramedic Ground Squad1 Air Squad1 Battalion Chief

2019 © TIM FORDHAM220

Page 221: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Jurisdictional Lifeguards and other agencies as listed on the Area Response Form.

Volume 10 Swift Water/Channel Rescue Response

5 Engines1 Truck1 Squad2 Air Squads1 USAR Task Force1 Swift Water Rescue1 BC

STANDARD RESPONSE AREA – BLUE WATER RESCUE The Primary jurisdictional - Blue Water Rescue

Response Area isMarina Del Rey area as dispatched by Command and Control.

The Secondary jurisdictional - Blue Water Rescue Response Area is

2019 © TIM FORDHAM221

Page 222: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Santa Monica Bay area as approved by the OPS Bureau Deputy Chief and/or the after hours duty chief.

Standard Response Area - Blue Water Rescue - Responses outside of the primary and secondary areas shall be approved by the Operations Chief Deputy, Fire Chief, or duty Deputy Chief.

Procedures: Strategic priorities (3)1. Protection of Rescuers2. Search for Victims3. Rescue of Victims

2019 © TIM FORDHAM222

Page 223: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

PROCEDURESRescue of victim’s methods listed in order of preference: (4)

a) Shore base rescues first when possibleb) Boats or helicoptersc) Rescue - FF's in the H20 as support for

lifeguards etcd) Contact rescue in the water by FF's. This

should be attempted only as a last resort

SAFETY Ropes: No ropes shall be tied around the waist,

torso, or any other part of a rescuers body when the rescuer is exposed to moving water

Personnel should not be attached to any rope system unless it can be assured that the rescuer shall not enter the water, or unless they are using an approved _____-_______ attachment.

quick-release

Low Head Dams: Personnel shall not enter the danger zone of a low head dam for any reason.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM223

Page 224: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 A ______ and ____ Safety position shall be

established whenever personnel are attempting rescue in moving water.

Downstream, Upstream

The Danger Zone of Low Head Dams are: (3)a) The area upstream of the damb) The area between the face of the dam and

the boil linec) The area immediately downstream of the

boil line

Work boots or turnout boots (without turnout pants) are permitted for support positions out of the water

Prohibited Items: When working in a position where personnel may slip or fall into moving water, the following items shall not be worn unless such items are required for firefighting or other specific hazards:

a. ________b. _________c. SCBA

Turnout Coats, Turnout Pants 2019 © TIM FORDHAM224

Page 225: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The final decision to wear Structural FF Helmets shall be left to the individual performing the rescue when personnel are in the water for rescue support

COMMAND For incidents in moving water, Incident

Commanders shall anticipate the need to make division assignments to cover the large geographic areas which might be involved. Effective divisions may include (2)

1. Linear sections of a waterway and/or2. The two shore lines (river left and river

right)

When referring to the two shore lines, you will call them river ______ and river _________.

left and right

COMMAND POST LOCATIONS Possible Command Post locations for water

rescue incidents should be identified on: (4)1. Waterway Rescue Preplans

2019 © TIM FORDHAM225

Page 226: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Station Flood Preparedness Plans3. Flood/Dam Failure Assessment4. Blue Water Rescue Preplans

SURF RESCUE Tactical Priorities: Surf Rescue:

1. Support Lifeguards, US Coast Guard etc2. Search for Victim3. Rescue4. Provide Medical aid

The Fire Departments primary role is to provide __________ and support _________ operations by lifeguards, the U.S. Coast Guard, Harbor Patrol, etc.

medical aid, search and rescue

If contact rescue is necessary and lifeguards are not available, the decision to enter the water shall be left to the discretion of personnel at scene.

LAKES, RESERVIORS, ETC.. Tactical Priorities: (4)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM226

Page 227: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Support Lifeguards when they are at scene2. If the victim is missing, initiate a search3. Rescue4. Provide Medical Aid

SWIFTWATER RESCUESwiftwater Rescue: The Size Up Report shall include:

a) Location of the victim, or location where the victim was last seen

b) Conditions at scene-H20 depth, speedc) Assessment of hazards to personnel (debris,

low head dams, etc.)d) Initial action and instructions to incoming

units. This shall be based on any H20 preplans and conditions

The Initial Action Plan shall include:1. Request for sufficient assistance2. Search for Victims3. Rescue4. Provide Medical Aid5. Termination of the incident6. Demobilization

2019 © TIM FORDHAM227

Page 228: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The ______ is responsible for searches in

mountainous, remote, and designated areas. The Fire Dept. is responsible for providing support as needed with search operations, assisting with rescue, and providing medical aid

Sheriff Department

The IC shall coordinate the rescue effort or assign that responsibility to another officer. The officer in charge or rescue operations shall assure that ________ is provided

Downstream safety

_______ shall be responsible for termination of search and rescue operations. Search operations are to continue as long as there is reason to suspect that victims may still be alive.

IC

Demobilization: Normally, upstream units will be released first, followed by downstream units in descending order

2019 © TIM FORDHAM228

Page 229: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 _____________: Water related accidents,

disasters or catastrophes which in the open waters of LA County

Blue Water Rescue Incident

_____________: A Fire Department resource consisting of a minimum of two certified rescue swimmers trained in the deployment of flotation devices and recovery of survivors at a water rescue incident and a safety person remaining on the vessel

Blue Water Rescue Unit

11.7.2 MARINE DISASTERS1/1/98

The Department is a participating agency in the Los Angeles International Airport (LAX) Air/Sea Disaster Plan.

______________________ is responsible for incident coordination and the waters adjacent to Los Angeles County.

United States Coast Guard Group LA/Long Beach

2019 © TIM FORDHAM229

Page 230: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The U.S.C.G is assigned as the Federal Search and Rescue _______________

Mission Coordinator

_______________ shall determine the type and general location of the incident. Interpret the initial report and classified the event as a Marine Incident or a Marine Disaster.

Command and Control

The first arriving marine base unit on scene shall act as the ___________.

On Scene Commander (OSC)

The OSC is responsible for recommending the appropriate shoreside evacuation site.

Upon arrival of a United States Coast Guard surface Search and Rescue Unit (SRC), the On Scene Commander (OSC) shall ____ command to the USCG

Transfer

2019 © TIM FORDHAM230

Page 231: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The first arriving shore based unit at the

designated Evacuation site shall act as the ____________ (CJIC).

Civil Jurisdictional Incident Commander

The CJIC shall request Command and Control to dispatch a ____________ when their Evacuation site is within this Department's jurisdiction.

Marine Evacuation Response

The Civil Jurisdictional Incident Commander is responsible for: (4)

1. Shoreline Incident Command2. Multi casualty operations3. Coordinating evacuation site security with

local law enforcement4. Communication coordination

A Safety Officer shall be designated for the _________ emergency scene and the _______ evacuation site

Marine, shoreside

2019 © TIM FORDHAM231

Page 232: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Incident Priorities at as a Marine Disaster are:

(3)1. Protection of life2. Protection and Conservation of the

environment3. Protection of property and equipment

It is the responsibility of the ______ to determine when the water entry is safe and personnel shall enter the water only with their approval

Rescue Vessel Operator

The decision to deploy rescue personnel from a helicopter will rest with the helicopter pilot, inconjunction with the ________

On Scene Commander

Because of the complex nature and numerous agencies involved, Marine Disasters require the use of Unified Command

Minor Marine Disaster < 9 victims3 Lifeguard Rescue Boats1 Fire Boat

2019 © TIM FORDHAM232

Page 233: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112 Helicopters/Air Squads1 BC1 Dive Rescue Unit1 USAR Unit1 Lifeguard Captain2 Lifeguard Lieutenants3 Lifeguard Rescue Vehicles

Major Marine Disaster > 105 Lifeguard Rescue Boats1 Fire Boat3 Helicopters/Air Squads2 BC1 Assistant Chief1 Dive Rescue Unit1 USAR unit2 Lifeguard Captains4 Lifeguard Lieutenants3 Lifeguard Rescue Vehicles

Marine Evacuation Standard Response: dispatched for a Marine Evacuation at a shore based evacuation site within this Department jurisdiction shall be:

4 Engines2019 © TIM FORDHAM233

Page 234: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111 Truck1 Squad1 Ambulance1 BC

2019 © TIM FORDHAM234

Page 235: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

MARINE OPERATIONS Tactical Priorities for Marine operations are: (4)

a) Locate incident/Size Upb) Search and rescue operationsc) Rapid Transport of survivors and victims to

the evacuation sited) Scene security

The first arriving marine unit shall act as the On Scene Commander and provide a size up to Command and Control and the US Coast Guard Search and Rescue Mission Coordinator. Size up shall include: (5)

1. Type of vessel/aircraft involved2. Approximate number of survivors/victims3. Latitude and longitude4. On scene weather/sea conditions5. Recommended evacuation site

The On Scene Commander (OSC) shall take action, provide for personnel safety, and request additional resources as needed. Upon arrival of the Coast Guard surface Search and Rescue

2019 © TIM FORDHAM235

Page 236: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Unit (SRU), command of the on scene marine units shall be ______

transferred

All incident SRU’s shall be under the command of the OSC. The OSC shall report to the SMC on the designated marine frequency.

Responding Marine units shall activate ________ when on scene

blue light

Upon identifying the search/incident area, the _______ of the Port shall establish a safety zone to provide scene security and prevent non essentials vessels from entering the area

USCG Captain

Shore Based Operations: Tactical Priorities of shore based operations: (5)

a) Shoreside Incident Commandb) Logistical support of Marine Disaster

Operationsc) Multi casualty operationsd) Communication coordination

2019 © TIM FORDHAM236

Page 237: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11e) Scene security

Tactical operations of Shore Base Rescues: the highest ranking Chief/Company officer shall assume the role of Civil jurisdiction IC when the evacuation site is located within the department's jurisdiction and request a ________

Marine Evacuation Response

The C.J.I.C is responsible for shoreside Incident Command and Marine Disaster logistical support

The CJIC shall coordinate multi-casualty operations, including

1. Requesting additional FD units2. Triage, treatment and transportation of the

survivors/victims3. Establishing communications with the

Medical Alert Center via the HEAR radio4. Requesting HERT teams when appropriate

The CJIC shall request an incident communications plan through Command and Control that may include:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM237

Page 238: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Command Channel2. Marine Tactical Channel3. Shore based Tactical Channel4. Air to Ground Channel5. Medical Group Tactical Channel

The C J I C, in cooperation with the local law enforcement shall establish a site exclusion perimeter with a designated ______ and media press area

traffic plan

APPENDIX I The Commander USCG Group Los Angeles

Long Beach is known as the _______Captain of the Port

_______________: The Chief/company officer from the local jurisdictional agency responsible for shoreside Incident Command and Evacuation Site Operations

Civil Jurisdiction, Incident Commander

2019 © TIM FORDHAM238

Page 239: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ______________: 32 foot rescue boat equipped

for water rescue, diving, medical rescue, and fire suppression and dewatering operations

Lifeguard Rescue Boat

___________: Significant marine emergency, involving a marine vessel of aircraft with 9 victims or less

Minor Marine Disaster

________________: Significant Marine Emergency, involving a marine vessel or aircraft with___ victims or more.

Major Marine Disaster, 10

___________: The commander of the first arriving marine unit or the commander of the USCG surface SRU assigned to coordinator Marine Operations

On Scene Commander (OSC)

_______________: The Commander USCG Group Los Angeles –Long Beach assigned to coordinator and control the rescue effort until its conclusion

2019 © TIM FORDHAM239

Page 240: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Search Mission Coordinator (SMC)

_____________: Surface vessel or aircraft staffed with trained personnel and provided with equipment suitable for expeditious conduct of a search and rescue mission

Search and Rescue Unit (SRU)

Where is the County of Los Angeles Fire Department Evacuation site for a marine disaster

Marina Del Rey

2019 © TIM FORDHAM240

Page 241: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11CHAPTER 8 – EARTHQUAKE PROCEDURES

11.8.1 EARTHQUAKE PROCEDURES01/01/96

Company Officers/Helicopter Pilots are responsible for:

1. Supervising a safe evacuation of the site2. Implementing the rescue of injured persons

at the site3. Assessing the availability of all emergency

equipment at the site4. Assessing and reporting the information

gathered in the Site Survey5. Completing a Primary and/or Secondary

Jurisdictional Survey6. Reporting Jurisdictional Survey results7. The triage and management of all reported

alarms8. Recording and documenting response

activity and actions

Battalion Commanders are responsible for:1. Communicating Earthquake intensity

Rating Level

2019 © TIM FORDHAM241

Page 242: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Establishing a Battalion Command Post

when operating in Dispatch Modes 2,3,43. Gathering and reporting jurisdictional

survey to FCCF and AC4. Establishing Field Command during

Dispatch Mode 45. Staffing and coordinating PSAP when

directed by Command and Control

All decision making and action plans will be based on the Department priorities of: (4)

a) Protecting lifeb) Protecting propertyc) Protecting the environmentd) Assisting other agencies

Strategic priorities for helicopters shall be: (4)a) Strategic reconnaissanceb) Medical evacuationc) Crew shuttlesd) Personnel pick-ups

COMPANY STATUS AND SITE SURVEY

2019 © TIM FORDHAM242

Page 243: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Company Status and Site Survey: When an earthquake occurs, the site supervisor and/or company officer shall: (7)

1. Ensure the safety of all personnel2. Direct movement of apparatus to a safe

location3. Immediately notify Command and Control

that an earthquake has occurred4. Go on radio and MDT standby5. Determine status of facility6. Direct a Site Survey,7. Report the Site Survey to Battalion

Commander with 15 minutes

When an earthquake occurs the Site Survey results are given to the jurisdictional BC with ___ min. of the event.

15

Jurisdictional survey shall be completed when: (3)

a) When directed by FCCFb) When any administration site in their

battalion has experienced an earthquake

2019 © TIM FORDHAM243

Page 244: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11with an intensity rating of a level 2 or greater

c) When directed by the jurisdictional BC.

Primary Jurisdictional Surveys shall be conducted Code R and completed in less than ________ minutes.

thirty

Company Officers shall report jurisdictional survey information to the Battalion Commander within _____ or immediately upon completion of the respective survey

30 minutes

Secondary Jurisdictional Surveys shall be completed when additional resources are assigned to the area or as soon as possible after the completion of the Primary Jurisdictional Survey

Battalion Command: BC's shall report the FCCF the Earthquake Intensity Rating Level for there immediate location within __ minutes.

52019 © TIM FORDHAM244

Page 245: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

BC's shall be prepared to establish a battalion command post with __ minutes of and earthquake and/or ALL Call notification.

15

Company Status: Once personnel are accounted for, the company officer or site supervisor shall: (4)

a. Direct the movement of all apparatus to the “Apparatus Safety Zone”

b. Direct personnel to determine the status of the site/facility

c. Direct personnel to go on radio standbyd. Direct a Site Survey

Company officers shall direct a Site Survey to determine: (4)

1. Injuries to personnel2. Availability of company or unit3. Availability of other resources at the site4. Damage to the administrative site structures

using the EQ Intensity Rating Level Scale

Earthquake Intensity Rating Level Scale: (6)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM245

Page 246: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Level 0 Nothing feltLevel 1 EQ felt, no damageLevel 2 Windows brokeLevel 3 Block walls downLevel 4 Structures shifted off foundationsLevel 5 Structural collapse

Site survey shall be reported within 15 minutes using the following communications priorities to the BC:

a) MDT (Send to both the Battalion Commander vehicle and Battalion Headquarters Station)

b) Assigned tactical frequencyc) Assigned TRO frequency (direct mode first,

then repeater)d) Telephonee) Relay via field units

2019 © TIM FORDHAM246

Page 247: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Site Survey: When unable to contact the BC or the Battalion HQ's for 15 minutes contact FCCF using the following communications priorities:

1. Blue 4 (repeat)2. MDT to "LA"3. Telephone4. TAC 3

The Site Survey report should be an exception type of report only problems or deviations form the norm should be reported. The report format should contain the following information: (5)

a) The station or unit reportingb) The availability of apparatusc) The earthquake Intensity rating if 2 or

greaterd) Any injuries to personnele) Any serious damage to the facility

BC's or Battalion HQ personnel shall report to FCCF and Division HQ’s after all stations have reported. If all sites have not reported, report available information within ________ minutes. Follow up with a complete report after all sites have reported.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM247

Page 248: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

twenty (20)

If unable to contact the jurisdictional Battalion Commander: The company officer or site supervisor shall report the information to the appropriate __________

Battalion Headquarters

If unable to contact the appropriate Bn Headquarters after __ minutes, contact Command and Control directly.

15

If a company fails to report their Site Survey, the Battalion Commander shall:

Assign Resources as Needed to Complete Site Survey

The BC or BN Headquarters will report survey results to Command and Control using the following communication priorities: (4)

a) Blue 4 (Repeat Mode)b) MDT to “LA”c) Telephone

2019 © TIM FORDHAM248

Page 249: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d) TAC 3

Companies Officers and or site supervisors shall document all activities on ICS form ___.

214

BC and Company Officers shall refer to the _______ for Earthquake planning info. specific to their jurisdiction

Emergency Information File

DISASTER COMMUNICATIONS PLAN Mode _ is normally the Department Dispatch

Mode and will be used initially. Individual Bn.'s may operate in different dispatch Modes dependent on their requirements

1 FCCF will implement the Disaster

Communications plan when: (3)a) FCCF experiences significant shakingb) FCCF has been notified by a Site

Supervisor of an earthquakec) The CUBE computer alarm was activated

due to an earthquake, either within LA Co. 2019 © TIM FORDHAM249

Page 250: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11or in an area immediately adjacent to LA Co., of magnitude ___ or greater

3.5

When notified of an earthquake Command and Control shall page all Battalion Commanders AND request an immediate Earthquake Intensity Rating Level from their location.

If all Bn Commanders report a Level 1 or less, Battalion Commanders shall be repaged and informed that the earthquake registered a Level 1 or less throughout Los Angeles County and to continue to operate in Dispatch Mode 1

FCCF will activate an MDT "ALL CALL" when there has been and reported Level __ intensity rating reported by a Bn Commander or CUBE computer identifies an Earthquake magnitude of ___ or greater either within Los Angeles County or in an area immediately adjacent to Los Angeles County.

2, 4.5

2019 © TIM FORDHAM250

Page 251: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 If the damage is localized or sporadic, only the

battalions reporting a Level 2 or greater will be instructed to operated in Dispatch Mode _____

2

Battalions operating in Dispatch Mode 2 shall be directed to complete a _________

Primary Jurisdictional Survey

If communications cannot be established with Command and Control, the BN. Commander shall immediately implement _____________, Dispatch Mode __ including the staffing of local PSAP's Public Safety Answering Points

Field Command, 4

DISPATCH MODEThe Disaster Communications plan has (4) Dispatch Modes:

a) Mode 1 – Normal Dispatchingb) Mode 2 – Central Command, single

resourcesc) Mode 3 – District Command, responses

prioritized by jurisdictional companies2019 © TIM FORDHAM251

Page 252: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d) Mode 4 – Field Command, Bn Commander

establishes communications with PSAP

Reduced response levels prioritized by Command and Control, which is Mode _ also referred to as ___________. Reduce response levels to single resources for each incident and dispatch using the MDT with limited voice on the assigned TRO frequency only

2, Central Command

In Mode 2 all units go on radio standby monitoring: (3)

MDT, Assigned TRO, Assigned Tactical

2019 © TIM FORDHAM252

Page 253: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Mode ___: Command and Control will dispatch resources using the MDT and limited voice on the TRO frequency

2

Mode 2: The company officer shall advise the Battalion Commander of any significant working incident. Battalion Commanders shall establish a Battalion Command Post, and will not be responded on incidents by Command and Control

District response prioritization and frequency modification occurs during Mode _, also referred as _________. Command and Control will send all responses to the jurisdictional companies for prioritization and implement Bn. earthquake frequencies

3, District Command

During Mode 3 Communications the _____________ shall prioritize and handle outstanding incidents, documenting all actions.

Company Officer

2019 © TIM FORDHAM253

Page 254: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11During Mode _ also referred to as __________, each battalion must function on its own. All communications between Command and Control and the field have failed.

4, Field Command

During Mode 4 the Battalion Commander shall establish communication with the local ___________ (PSAPs).

Public Safety Answering Points

Battalion Commanders shall perform all the functions normally associated with Command and Control including the dispatch or resources, tracking of resources and the documentation of emergency activities

Bn. Commanders shall utilize the following communication priorities to dispatch resources within their battalions:

a) Assigned TRO frequency (direct mode first, then repeat mode)

b) Assigned tactical frequencyc) ___________

Relay via field units2019 © TIM FORDHAM254

Page 255: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Company officers should use the following communications priorities to report both site and jurisdictional survey results to Bn. Commanders and/or Bn. Headquarters personnel

1. MDT2. Tactical Frequency3. TRO frequency (Direct than Repeat)4. __________5. Relay via field units

telephone

Bn. Commanders and/or Bn. HQ. Personnel should use the following communications priorities to report both site and jurisdictional survey information to Command and Control

1. ___________2. MDT to "LA"3. Telephone4. Tac 3

Blue 4 (Repeat Mode)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM255

Page 256: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Battalion Commanders should use the following communications priorities to request resources from Command and Control

a) Assigned TRO Frequencyb) MDT to “LA”c) Telephoned) Blue 4 (Repeat Mode)

JURISDICTIONAL SURVEYJurisdictional Surveys shall be performed by all stations within a battalion when any administrative site within the battalion registers a level _, directed by Command and Control, or by the ___________.

2, Battalion Commander

The _____________ shall be started IMMEDIATELY upon the completion and reporting of the Site Survey.

Primary Jurisdictional Surveys

Primary Jurisdictional Survey: The information desired is the status of _________ hazard occupancies only

2019 © TIM FORDHAM256

Page 257: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11high life

All primary jurisdictional surveys will be conducted Code R and completed in less than ________ minutes.

thirty (30)

The Company officer shall only interrupt a Primary Jurisdictional Survey to respond to an __________ life threatening incident. Assume Command of incident and report it to _______ and the ___________

immediate, FCCF, BC

Company officers shall forward their Primary Jurisdictional Survey information to their ________ immediately upon completion.

Battalion Commander

The information desired during a Secondary Jurisdictional Survey is: (5)

1. Status of essential facilities2. Status of major transportation arteries3. Impact area4. Additional resource needs

2019 © TIM FORDHAM257

Page 258: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 115. Other significant information

Jurisdictional Survey reports shall be made using the following communications priorities:

1. MDT2. Assigned Tactical Frequency3. Assigned TRO (Direct than Repeat)4. Telephone5. Relay Via Field Units6. Helicopter Jurisdictional Survey reports to

FCCF via TAC 3

2019 © TIM FORDHAM258

Page 259: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Secondary Jurisdictional Survey: If unable to contact the appropriate Bn. HQ. after ___ minutes, contact Command and Control directly using the following communications priorities:

1. Blue 4 (Repeat Mode)2. _______3. ______4. Tac 3

15 min, MDT to "LA", Telephone,

If a company reports that they are unable to complete a Jurisdictional Survey, the Battalion Commander shall assign resources as needed to complete the Jurisdictional Survey.

Secondary Jurisdictional Survey. If all battalion sites have not reported there Jurisdictional Survey, report to Command and Control what information is available within __ minutes to expedite the Department Planning process.

30

The company officer shall record all non life threatening incident information on ICS form

2019 © TIM FORDHAM259

Page 260: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11____ for timely response after the Jurisdictional Survey is completed

214

OFF DUTY PERSONNEL Damage is localized: If possible, platoon

personnel shall be recalled to cover for employees who are on duty who live in the areas most affected by earthquake damage.

If damage is extensive and widespread “platoon personnel” shall report the closest battalion HQ's after stabilizing their family or within ___ hours of the event.

four

The Employee Acknowledgment Form (Form 639) the order of assignment is: (3)

a) The nearest Battalion Headquartersb) The nearest Alternate Battalion

Headquartersc) The nearest fire station

2019 © TIM FORDHAM260

Page 261: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 If unable to report the closest battalion HQ's the

following order of assignment is:1. The nearest Alternate Battalion

Headquarters2. The nearest fire station

BATTALION COMMAND In dispatch Mode 2 and 3 the Battalion

Commanders shall:a. Establish a command postb. Ensure the completion of all battalion Site

Surveysc. Immediately report battalion Site Survey

information to Command and Control and division headquarters. Report info within __ minutes regardless if all sites have not reported.

d. Ensure the completion of all battalion jurisdictional surveys. Assign resources if a company can’t complete survey

e. Report battalion jurisdictional survey information to Command and Control an Division. Report info within __ minutes regardless if all sites have not reported

2019 © TIM FORDHAM261

Page 262: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11f. Determine resource needs and forward the

request to Command and Control

g. Develop a written Incident Action Plan using ICS form 201

h. Display the situation informationi. Establish an action item listj. Monitor radio traffick. Develop an organization for the battalionl. Oversee and modify as necessary the

utilization and dispatching of resourcesm. Develop and implement a plan to utilize

convergent resourcesn. Establish communications with assisting

agencieso. Prepare to brief the Assistant Fire Chief

20, 30

In Dispatch Mode 4 (Field Command) the BC shall handle all the duties associated with Dispatch Mode 2 and 3, and the following

a. Establish communications with the local Public Safety Answering Points, and staff any local city EOC if necessary

2019 © TIM FORDHAM262

Page 263: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11b. Obtain, gather and compile requests for

servicec. Prioritize all requests for serviced. Dispatch resources accordinglye. Maintain the status of and track all

resources with the battalionf. Maintain a record of all actions and

decisionsg. When a decision is made to terminate

Battalion Command, Command and Control shall be informed of battalion resource status

In battalions where additional resources, more than one (1) strike team are required, the battalion will be _____ and an _________ will be established.

Split, ICS Complex

APPENDIX I Battalion Command: Battalion commanders

will assume command responsibility for their battalions, will not respond to individual incidents and ensure adequate resources are

2019 © TIM FORDHAM263

Page 264: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11responded to all emergency incidents within their battalion jurisdiction.

Field Command: Battalion commanders will assume all the duties normally associated with Command and Control, assume command responsibility for their battalions, will not respond to individual incidents and will insure adequate resources are responded to all emergency incidents within their battalion jurisdiction.

A program for providing real time earthquake information to subscribers located outside on the Seismological Laboratory at Caltech (_._._._.)

C.U.B.E - Caltech/U.S. Geological Survey Broadcast of Earthquakes

Two or more individual incidents located in the same general area which are assigned to a single IC or to unified command. Define:

ICS Complex

2019 © TIM FORDHAM264

Page 265: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Jurisdictional Survey - A survey of each

station's jurisdictional area to determine: (4)1. Status of high life hazard occupancies2. Status of essential facilities3. Status of major transportation arteries4. Other significant information

2019 © TIM FORDHAM265

Page 266: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Site Survey: A survey of an administrative site and resources to determine: (5)

a) The availability of company or unitb) The availability of other resources at the sitec) Damage to the administrative site using the

Earthquake Intensity Rating Scaled) Any injuries to personnele) Any serious damage to the site or facility

11.8.2 – TSUNAMI POLICY11/12/13

Near-source tsunamis present maximum danger due to the potential size of the waves, their rapid impact, lack of warning, and the challenge of evacuating all potential victims to high ground in 3 to 10 minutes.

Magnitude ____or greater earthquakes are considered the likely threshold for tsunami generation. Localized tsunami action and effects may continue for 24 to 48 hours.

7.0

Company Officers are responsible for:1. The safety of their assigned personnel and

2019 © TIM FORDHAM266

Page 267: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11equipment.

2. Establishing and maintaining Tsunami Strategic Maps maintained in the ____________.

3. Conducting annual review of the Tsunami Strategic Maps and this instruction with subordinates in October.Emergency Information File

Los Angeles Command and Control (LACC) shall conduct an immediate “All Call” for all local earthquakes over Magnitude ___ to notify field units of the magnitude and epicenter prior to a roll call of each battalion commander.

4.5

LACC is responsible for notifying all chief officers “All-Call” of Tsunami Watches, Advisories and ________ with pertinent information and updates including epicenter and geographic location, ground shaking level, and estimated arrival times.

Warnings

Department Operations Center (DOC) at LACC shall be the initial incident planning until coastal unified ICP’s can be established.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM267

Page 268: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Battalion/Section Chiefs are responsible for:1. Conducting an annual review of tsunami strategic maps in October2. Establishing tsunami unified command posts based on the LACo Operational Area Emergency Response Plan- Tsunami Annex.3. Establishing a communications plan with LACC and ordering resources.4. Anticipating the need for fire department coordination and plan to evacuate “special needs” populations.5.Maintaining personnel accountability reporting (PAR).6. Directing a coordinated airborne search and rescue operations over land and water after tsunami impact.7. Directing post-impact waterborne search and rescue on the sea and inundated inland areas.8. Determining when it is safe for emergency re-engagement to conduct life-saving operations in Tsunami Inundation Zones. This is not an “All Clear”. This is emergency engagement into tsunami impact areas to save lives, with (LCES) in place.9. Directing strategic ground search and rescue operations, initially concentrating on vertical evacuation sites, and the “tsunami interface” to inundated areas.10. Ensuring that LCES remains in place until it has been determined by the Unified Command that the tsunami event is over.

All supervisors of fire stations, and lifeguard facilities in Tsunami Inundation Zones are responsible for the following:

1. Being familiar with the boundaries of Tsunami Inundation Zones, (available on the Department website and the County of Los Angeles website), local tsunami evacuation routes, and designating high ground/safe zones included in the Emergency Information File.2. Safe evacuation of personnel to the designated high ground/safe zones and relocating marine resources (Baywatch/fire 2019 © TIM FORDHAM268

Page 269: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11boats), a minimum of one (1) mile offshore at least ___ minutes before the anticipated arrival of tele-tsunamis or severe tidal surges.3. When strong sustained shaking (longer than ___seconds) is felt at the coast or when a magnitude 7.0 or greater offshore quake occurs, ensuring Depart. vessels are double-tied to moorings and personnel evacuated to the designated high ground/safe zones until it is determined no tsunamis exists.4. Establishing and maintaining LCES.5.Maintaining personnel accountability reporting (PAR).6. In coordination with the Incident Commanders, initiate strategic re- engagement into tsunami impact zones to conduct targeted helicopter- based, boat-based, and ground-based search and rescue operations.

30 min, 20 sec

Law enforcement agencies are responsible for evacuation and the Department is responsible for assisting with the evacuation of “_________” populations (people and their companion animals requiring physical removal).

special needs

The Unified Command (after appropriate consultation with subject matter experts monitoring) is responsible in determining when an “All Clear” shall be announced for the operational areas.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM269

Page 270: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Incident Priorities:1. Life Safety2. Property3. __________ 4. Assisting other public safety agencies

Environment

Near-Source Event (local earthquake): Personnel in Tsunami Inundation Zones shall immediately perform the following tasks in the event of strong sustained earthquake shaking exceeding 20 seconds at the coast, or Level 2 or greater earthquake damage on the coast; or a magnitude 7.0 or greater earthquake with an offshore epicenter; or signs of ocean disturbance indicating a tsunami condition, or a formal tsunami warning following a coastal quake.

1. Conduct a personnel accountability report (PAR)

2. Respond Code 3 to a designated high ground/safe zone. Located in the Emergency Information File

3. Fire boat personnel shall double-tie Dept

2019 © TIM FORDHAM270

Page 271: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11vessels to moorings and evacuate to a high ground/safe zone.

4. Establish and maintain LCES, with a lookout operating from a high ground/safe zone and provide communication to ground units in Tsunami Inundation Zones

5. Initially conduct a jurisdictional damage survey of areas above 50’ elevation and out of the Tsunami Inundation Zone, with a visual survey of damage evident in the Tsunami Inundation Zone.6. If the quake is determined to have occurred onshore, or it is determined to be less than magnitude 7.0 offshore; or if no tsunami or tidal surge is evident in the first 10 minutes, Department resources shall conduct normal post-quake operations (with appropriate surveillance for tidal surges).

Tele-Tsunami Event: Upon issuance of a Tsunami Warning for a distant event, company officers shall move all personnel and equipment to high ground/safe zones __ minutes prior to projected arrival of tsunami or tidal surge. Company officers may assume patrol status, assist with “special needs” evacuation, and conduct other emergency operations. All Baywatch and fire boats shall be moved at least one mile off shore to their safe refuge area __ minutes prior to the projected arrival of tele-tsunamis or severe tidal surge.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM271

Page 272: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 1130, 30

LEVEL I: Tsunami Watch LACC shall make notifications and continue to

monitor the tsunami pager, the West Coast and Alaska Tsunami Warning Center (WCATWC) webs, and the California Integrated Seismic Network, and provide updates to the Central Region Operations Deputy Chief, the Duty Deputy Chief and Duty AC, and the Jurisdictional AC.

LEVEL II: Tsunami Advisory (IN ADDITION TO ABOVE - Tsunami Watch) The Central Region Operations Deputy Chief or

the Duty Deputy Chief shall authorize LACC to make the following notifications of the Tsunami Advisory with pertinent information and updates:

1. Executive Staff and Duty Chiefs2. Tsunami SME’s3. “All Call” with MDT alarm to alert all

field personnel4. Region I fire departments5. Coastal assistant chief and lifeguard chief

2019 © TIM FORDHAM272

Page 273: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 116. Technical Operations section chief7. Urban Search and Rescue (USAR)

Coordinator8. CA-TF2 Coordinator9. Haz Mat Coordinator10. EMS Director

Operations personnel assigned to resources/administrative sites within a Tsunami Inundation Zone and others as assigned shall:

1. Annually review the earthquake and tsunami procedures located in the Emergency Information File.

2. Conduct a jurisdictional survey to determine potential life safety hazards Lifeguards shall enforce beach, harbor, and marina closures and restrictions, and warn/advise beach patrons to stay off the beach.

3. Coordinate with law enforcement to determine and plan evacuation of “special needs” civilians as needed

4. Prepare to move all personnel and apparatus to high ground/safe zones based on projected tsunami arrival.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM273

Page 274: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 115.Ops personnel may assist with beach and

harbor closures when tide height + expected tsunami surge = greater than 5 feet.

6. All personnel and apparatus shall move to high ground 30 minutes prior to projected tsunami impact. Baywatch and fire boats shall move to their safety zone one mile off shore 30 minutes prior.

7. Decisions to restrict/close/evacuate beaches, harbors, and marinas shall be made by the Unified Command.

LEVEL III: Tsunami Warning (IN ADDITION TO ABOVE) Personnel in Tsunami Inundation Zones shall:

1. Review earthquake and tsunami procedures in the Emergency Information File.

2. Conduct a jurisdictional survey (Code 3 or non-Code 3 depending on the tsunami arrival time), to determine life safety hazards, review escape routes, high ground/safe zones, and critical facilities.

3. Lifeguard resources shall enforce

2019 © TIM FORDHAM274

Page 275: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11restrictions and closures and direct people to stay off rocks, jetties, etc..

4. Coordinate with law enforcement to plan and conduct evacuation of special needs civilians and animals.

5. Respond to high ground/safe zones at least 30 minutes prior to the anticipated tsunami arrival. Baywatch and fire boats shall be in place in their safety zone one (1) mile offshore at least 30 minutes prior to anticipated tsunami arrival. Baywatch/fire boats may be called to emergencies while staging off shore, and it shall be the Baywatch or fire boat captain’s decision whether to attempt emergency operations.

6. Based on projected incident specific information and direction, assist with beach and harbor closures.

7. Conduct harbor/beach restrictions, closures, and evacuations based on direction from Unified Command.

Evacuations shall be coordinated with law enforcement. Public evacuation notifications may be made using the following methods:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM275

Page 276: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Airborne public address announcements2. Public address announcements via land-

based units3. Press releases4. Alert LA (Reverse 911)5. L.A. County Emergency Alert System

(EAS) and Emergency News Network (ENN)

Helicopters and boat resources should be considered to initiate search and rescue operations in the ocean, harbors, marinas, ports, and inundated areas when conditions allow. Depending on anticipated size and effects of tsunami impact, USAR Task Forces, Swiftwater Rescue Teams, Dive 1, the Swiftwater Rescue Task Force, and/or other components of CATF-2, Engine Strike Teams, Dozer Strike Teams, Crew Strike Teams, Heavy Squads and medical cache, Ambulance Strike Teams, MIRV, and CA-TF2 deployments should be considered to be in place ____minutes prior to anticipated tsunami arrival.

30

2019 © TIM FORDHAM276

Page 277: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Battalion chiefs and lifeguard section chiefs are

responsible for co-locating and establishing Unified Incident Command Posts. Until coastal unified ICP’s can be established, initial incident command shall be the ___________ at LACC.

Department Operations Center (DOC)

LEVEL IV: Sustained Strong Coastal Earthquake (20 seconds or longer) or Coastal or Offshore Earthquake Magnitude 7.0 or greater A Magnitude 7.0 or greater earthquake

originating on a coastal or offshore thrust fault could potentially generate near-source tsunamis that can strike the coast and Catalina Island within as little as 3-15 minutes. Another danger is the 2,600 feet high submarine cliffs located one mile off the Palos Verdes Peninsula that may collapse from any cause including local onshore or offshore earthquakes, which would displace enough water to generate a series of large tsunamis impacting the coast and Catalina Island within minutes.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM277

Page 278: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Emergency personnel and civilians in potential

Tsunami Inundation Areas should immediately evacuate to high ground/safe zones immediately after strong sustained coastal shaking (20 seconds or longer) and/or a Magnitude 7.0 or greater offshore earthquake.

1. Personnel shall establish LCES and observe for signs of impending tsunami or severe tidal surge for 15-20 minutes. All field units in Tsunami Inundation Zones shall conduct their initial site and jurisdictional surveys from high ground.

2. If there are no signs of a tsunami within 15 to 20 minutes, it should be assumed that no near-source tsunamis have been generated. Company officers with concurrence of battalion or section chiefs consider returning to complete the damage survey after “All Clear” has been determined.

3. Baywatch and fire boat units that are already offshore at the time of the event shall respond to deep water a minimum of one (1) mile offshore after strong sustained shaking (20 seconds or longer), or if a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM278

Page 279: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Magnitude 7.0 or greater coastal offshore earthquake occurs. Baywatch and fire boats docked shall be double-tied to moorings and personnel shall respond to a designated high ground/safe zone.

LEVEL V: Actual Tsunami or Extreme Tidal Surge Impact After each tsunami impact, or severe tidal surge

event, an immediate assessment of conditions shall be initiated. These assessments may be conducted remotely (from high ground/safe zones), by helicopter, aircraft, or by vessels.

1.“Tsunami Interface” is a zone of high probability for survival of people trapped in vessels, automobiles, collapsed structures, and debris piles that should be a priority for search operations.

2.Many survivors may have been washed back to the ocean, making waterborne search another priority.

3. Survivors who used “vertical evacuation” may be trapped on “high ground”.

4. The main objective is to save lives while

2019 © TIM FORDHAM279

Page 280: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11maintaining a reasonable level of safety for Department personnel, including protection from subsequent tsunamis

5. Simultaneous aerial (helicopter), land-based, marine, and small rescue boat search and rescue operations may be required to rescue victims.

6. In the aftermath of a large and damaging tsunami impact, there is a need for “wide area search operations”. A “grid search” system shall be established to ensure that impacted coastal and inland areas.

7. All structures, vessels, and automobiles shall be marked using the standard USAR search marking system

8. Bodies located during search and rescue operations should be marked using the standard USAR search marking system when feasible. Body locations should be documented on maps. Bodies found floating in water shall be recovered or secured to fixed objects until recovery can be conducted.

9. The Unified Command (after appropriate consultation with SME’s monitoring the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM280

Page 281: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11actual ocean), shall determine when an “All Clear” is to be declared in Operational areas of Los Angeles County.

DEFINITIONS Tsunami: A series of long-period, lengthy

ocean waves generated by earthquakes, landslides, volcanic eruptions and other events that displace large water mass.

________: A tsunami that is generated from a distant source, which could impact Los Angeles County in 1.5 to 12 hours (depending on the location of the source).

Tele-Tsunami ____________: A tsunami event generated by a source close to the affected coast:

1. Consulting scientists have informed the Department that a Magnitude 7.0 or greater earthquake could potentially generate a series of near-source tsunamis that could strike the Los Angeles County mainland and Catalina Island in as little as 3-15 minutes.

2. Any sustained strong shaking (lasting 20

2019 © TIM FORDHAM281

Page 282: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11seconds or more) is the most reliable warning of potential near-source tsunami conditions. An off- shore earthquake with a Magnitude of 7.0 or greater is recommended by scientists as another benchmark for coastal evacuation.

3. Scientists also have discovered a line of 2,600’ submarine cliffs one mile off the Palos Verdes Peninsula (the San Pedro Escarpment), which could collapse from any cause (including local onshore or offshore earthquakes). Scientists are convinced that collapse of these undersea cliffs would cause a series of tsunamis up to 30’ high, striking the coast of mainland LACo. and Catalina Island within minutes.

Near-Source Tsunami

_____________ Zone: The California Emergency Management Agency (CAL EMA) commissioned a group of scientists to study the coastline of Los Angeles County to determine the most likely areas that could be inundated by near-source and tele-tsunami events.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM282

Page 283: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Tsunami Inundation

High ground/safe zone: A place of relative safety for emergency responders and civilians during tsunami events, located on coastal- accessible land a minimum of ____ foot above sea level and away from tributaries which can carry tsunami waves further inland or to higher elevations.

50’

Tsunami Information Statement: A tsunami information statement is issued to inform emergency management officials and the public that an earthquake has occurred, or that a tsunami warning, watch, or advisory has been issued for another section of the ocean.

A Tsunami ____________ is issued to alert emergency management officials and the public of an event which may later impact the watch area. The watch area may be upgraded to a warning, advisory, or canceled, based on updated information and analysis.

Watch2019 © TIM FORDHAM283

Page 284: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

A Tsunami ________ is issued due to the threat of a potential tsunami which may produce strong currents or waves dangerous to those in or near the water. The threat may continue for several hours after the arrival of the initial wave, but si g n i f ica n t w id e s p re a d in un d a ti o n is not ex p e c ted f o r a r ea s un d e r a n ad v isor y .

Advisory

A Tsunami ________ is issued when a p o t e n ti a l t s un a m i w ith si g n i f ica n t w id e s p re a d i nu n da ti o n is i m m i nen t o r e x pe c t e d . Warnings alert the public that widespread, dangerous coastal flooding accompanied by powerful currents is possible and may continue for several hours after arrival of the initial wave.

Warning ________ Evacuation: An alternate safe zone

when natural high ground cannot be reached before anticipated tsunami arrival. The upper floors or roofs of some multi-story buildings, freeway overpasses, or other high points. A “worst case” tsunami can overwhelm even a 3-story building, so taller structures are preferred.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM284

Page 285: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Vertical

Tsunami ______: A subjective term describing a “wide zone” bordering the edge of a tsunami’s inland travel, where homes, automobiles, and debris were pushed before the water reversed course and flowed back toward the ocean. Because this interface zone may not have been completely submerged, and because “dry” buildings may have been collapsed it is an area of high probability for live survivors, and therefore should be a priority for post-impact search and rescue operations using the standard five stages of structure collapse search/rescue.

Interface

All Clear: A subjective assessment that danger of additional tsunami waves or extreme tidal surges has diminished or ceased. CAL EMA may declare an “All Clear” when two hours has passed since a tsunami wave has impacted land. However, due to the potential for extended effects from local conditions, the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM285

Page 286: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Unified Command (after appropriate consultation with the SME’s monitoring the actual ocean, bay, harbor, marina, and port conditions), is responsible in determining when an “All Clear” shall be announced for the operational areas of LACo.

1. The “All Clear” after actual impact by extreme tidal surges is more complicated because ocean fluctuations may continue for 24 to 48 hours, with serious consequences harbors, bays, marinas, and ports.

2.If no signs of ocean disturbance are evident 15 to 20 minutes after strong coastal shaking, it can be assumed that no near-source tsunamis were generated (and thus an “All Clear” can be declared by commanders in the field, for the purpose of engaging responders in emergency operations in Tsunami Inundation Zones).

Fire Station / Lifeguard Station Tsunami Plan: A required component of the Emergency Information File for administrative sites in all coastal battalions and lifeguard sections whose jurisdiction includes a Tsunami Inundation

2019 © TIM FORDHAM286

Page 287: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Zone or where coastal land is less than ____ feet above sea level.

100’CHAPTER 9 – ENVIRONMENTAL EMERGENCIES

11.9.1 - AFRICANIZED HONEY BEE 1/22/13

Exclusion Zone: A minimum ___ foot area established around the insects. This area is subject to change according to swarm activity

300

It is the policy of the Department that when an active swarm of bees (not part of a commercial or private bee hive system) is reported, and our assistance is requested, our personnel will respond and _________ the swarm of bees.

exterminate

Los Angeles Communications Center (LACC) shall notify the local ______________ when active swarms are discovered and any incident of multiple stings from flying insects occurs.

Los Angeles County Vector Control District

2019 © TIM FORDHAM287

Page 288: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Resources shall respond to a reported inactive swarm Code ____.

2

2019 © TIM FORDHAM288

Page 289: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Resources shall respond Code __ to a reported active swarm of bees in which a person or an animal is being attacked.

3

All personnel shall wear full personal protective equipment including turnout pants, coat, helmet, gloves, and a bee veil. Pant cuffs, coat sleeves, collars, and the front of the coat along the snaps shall be taped securely against the body with duct tape for additional protection.

Procedures On-Scene: Non-Active swarm: - On private property, owners shall hire a bee

removal service to abate the problem.- On public property, LACC shall notify Los

Angeles County Vector Control to abate the problem.

Active swarm: If bees present an immediate or future danger to civilians or animals the bees shall be exterminated.

When a person or an animal is being attacked:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM289

Page 290: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11- Place a one inch hose line with a fog nozzle

and ____foam solution in service.- The nozzle should be on ____ spray and

directed to drive the insects away from the victim and personnel.

- Advise a victim to cover his/her eyes, nose, and mouth.

- The fog spray should then be directed ___ feet into the air and back down to the ground in ______ motions.

- If possible, place a second one inch hose line with a fog nozzle in service to further protection

- Establish and maintain an exclusion zone of at least 300 feet.

1%, wide-angle fog, 30, circular

Bee extermination method: A 1% solution of either Class “A” foam or _________ (AFFF is only on F1, F10, F73 or a few select engines companies in five gallon buckets) sprayed by a fog nozzle on AHB’s is sufficient to immediately immobilize the bees for an indefinite period of time.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM290

Page 291: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Aqueous Film Forming Foam

Foams are effective because they establish a physical and odor barrier against the AHB’s, neutralizing the alarm odor produced by AHB stings.

When an active swarm of bees is encountered and no persons or animals are threatened, Department personnel shall establish an exclusion zone

AHB’s that are in a defensive mode around their hives may pursue potential threats up to ___ mile from their hive.

1/4

When personnel encounter either active swarms of bees in wildland areas, without a protective hose line, a safe refuge area, or full turnout gear, they shall don a protective insect veil and retreat rapidly from the area.

Air drops with foam or retardant may be effective in killing/disorienting the AHB.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM291

Page 292: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Personnel should especially guard the mouth

and nose as bees are attracted by the carbon dioxide being exhaled. Bees are also attracted by dark colors, hence the white protective clothing worn by bee-keepers.

11.9.2 – SNAKE CALLS1/29/13

Station Response - Upon receipt of a reported snake call, other than a bite, _________, shall be dispatched

1 engine co. The Los Angeles Communications Center

(LACC) personnel shall dispatch the jurisdictional engine company, or next available resource, and request the jurisdictional animal control unit.

LACC personnel shall inform the caller that the policy of the LA Co fire dept is to exterminate all __________ snakes not to relocate them

poisonous

2019 © TIM FORDHAM292

Page 293: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11The response of the first in unit shall be Code __ if in structures, and/or in life threatening situations: Code __ may be used at the discretion of the fire captain on other non-threatening snake calls

"3""2"

The first unit to arrive shall not go available until the snake is relocated (non-poisonous), killed, escapes, is under the control of a Department, member or until _______ assumes responsibility for the snake.

Animal Care and Control

All poisonous snakes, and all snakes that are not positively identified as harmless, shall be treated as poisonous and shall be killed, or turned over to Department of Animal Care and Control. The owner/occupant shall be informed of the situation and permission to continue shall be obtained.

At any time, if the owner or the informant does not perceive the Department’s policies or

2019 © TIM FORDHAM293

Page 294: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11procedures to be acceptable, or if the incident becomes too dangerous to proceed, the supervisor on scene may elect to contain the area and wait for the arrival of Animal Care and Control personnel to assume responsibility.

Personnel shall not take any aggressive action or initiate any search until a minimum of ___ personnel are properly dressed, equipped with the correct tools, and identification information is obtained regarding the type of snake involved.

2

Personnel shall wear appropriate personal protective clothing (i.e., turnout coat, turnout pants, goggles, and structural firefighting gloves).

If required to kill a snake, remove its head with a strike to the neck from either a shovel or axe. Place decapitated head inside a tin can, and use a tool to collapse top of can, then fold top over once and place into a plastic bag. Personnel may transport the can to the local fire station

2019 © TIM FORDHAM294

Page 295: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11then turn over to an Animal Care and Control Officer for disposal. Or the container may be buried a minimum of ____ feet deep in dirt in a location not readily accessible to the public or to animals.

two

When the snake incident is terminated, and relocation is necessary, __________ shall be notified by LACC.

Animal Care and Control

If there are any questions as to the identification of the snake, or any doubt as to the level of safety provided to all individuals involved, evacuate the area and wait for Animal Care and Control personnel

Poisonous snakes found in Los Angeles County include: Southern Black Pacific Rattlesnake (Malibu area) Mojave Green Rattlesnake (Antelope Valley) Sidewinder (desert area) Red Speckled Rattlesnake Northern Pacific Rattlesnake Green Western Rattlesnake

2019 © TIM FORDHAM295

Page 296: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Poisonous snakes found in Los Angeles County

1. Southern Black Pacific Rattle Snake (Malibu Area)

2. Mojave Green (Antelope Valley)3. Sidewinder (desert area)4. Red Speckled Rattle Snake5. Northern Pacific Rattle Snake6. Green Western Rattle Snake

CHAPTER 10 – TERRORISM PROCEDURES

11.10.1 – TERRORISM –PROCEDURES FOR FIRST RESPONDERS 05/05/05 In general, terrorist attacks will present

themselves as a ______ and/or _______ incident possibly coupled with a multi casualty incident

hazardous materials, USAR

The acronym “CBRNE” stands for:Chemical BiologicalRadiologicalNuclearExplosive

2019 © TIM FORDHAM296

Page 297: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11The most common devices used by terrorists are ________

explosives

The most difficult and least likely device to be used by terrorist is a _______.device

nuclear

The least expensive device is one that is ____ or ____ in origin. The key to the successful use of chem-bio is an efficient means of dissemination

chemical or biological

The _____ process may be the single most important and demanding task that first responders can perform to counter the effects of CBRNE weapons

decontamination

____________________: responsible for providing the initial size up, initiating the Incident Command System, and taking the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM297

Page 298: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11necessary actions, as appropriate for the incident.

The first arriving company

___________ : responsible for the overall coordination of the IAP and coordination with command representatives from other agencies until the emergency has ended and order has been restored

Incident Commander

2019 © TIM FORDHAM298

Page 299: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

___________: personnel are responsible for the complete assessment of the immediate hazard when a CBRNE weapon is suspected or identified, providing the IC with technical assistance, and conducting and/or coordinating activities to minimize the effect of the hazard on life and health, the environment, and property

Hazardous Materials Task Force (HMTF)

_____________: personnel are responsible for providing the IC with technical information, conducting and/or coordinating procedures to minimize the effects of the hazards, and providing technical assistance and abilities as required to accomplish the mission objectives when an explosive device or building collapse has been identified.

USAR task force

Who shall also conduct and/or coordinate rapid intervention crew (RIC) activities as is necessary

USAR task force2019 © TIM FORDHAM299

Page 300: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

________________: They shall provide multi casualty mass decontamination (MCMD) staffing and equipment, medical specialists, USAR and HazMat technicians and other technical specialist that support the IC and emergency response personnel

Metropolitan Medical Response System Task Force (MMRS – TF)

___________: personnel are responsible for OA coordination regarding the remediation efforts when CBRNE have been released. These members shall provide technical assistance to the IC on the identification, mitigation, and cleanup of a hazmat material. They can also provide assistance in the decision to evacuate or shelter in place victims in an area or building.

Health HazMat Division (HHMD)

HMMD may participate in the ______ operations assessing, with monitors and survey devices, the effectiveness of the decontamination victims.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM300

Page 301: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11MCMD

Who will certify the area or building for re occupancy

HHMD

The _______ group personnel are responsible for notifying the Department of credible terrorist threats and providing support to responding agencies

Terrorism Early Warning (TEW)

Incident priorities for a suspected or confirmed terrorist incident shall include:

1. Protection of life/health2. Protection of the environment3. Protection of the crimes scene4. Protection of property and equipment5. Preservation of crime scene evidence

No responder shall enter a _____________ environment without wearing the appropriate PPE, and having received the necessary training required to understand and function in the type of hazard present

2019 © TIM FORDHAM301

Page 302: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11hazardous

Only specially trained and equipped personal (USAR, HazMat) shall be allowed into the _________ Zone once it has been established

Exclusion

Only the ___ may make an exception to this policy, and only after careful consideration of the circumstances

IC

The ____ after careful consultation with the appropriate Technical Specialist, may redefine the exclusion zone as well as any other perimeter required by the incident

IC

PROCEDURES At the first indication that an incident maybe of

a terrorist nature, the first arriving company shall retreat to a safe location (uphill/upwind/upstream) and institute ______ procedures

2019 © TIM FORDHAM302

Page 303: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

FRO

The first arriving company officer may depart from usual FRO procedures and establish an exclusion zone large enough to encompass the number of victims in the affected area and the amount of equipment necessary to accomplish emergency decontamination, plus an area designated as a safe refuge area (SRA).

An artificial line shall be established called the ________ (IDE) line to keep unauthorized persons out and to discourage victims from leaving until a more definitive care operation is established (i.e., MCMD or MCI)..

isolate and deny entry

PPE appropriate for the anticipated hazards of a suspected terrorism related incident shall be worn or kept readily available. This includes (3)

a. Department authorized respiratory protection

b. Mark-1(atropine, 2-pam/cl) auto-injectorsc. Personal dosimeter

2019 © TIM FORDHAM303

Page 304: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The first arriving company officer shall: (5) a. Conduct an initial size-up and communicate

initial and follow-up reports per Department policy

b. Request a Code “T” notification via CCD c. Request a metropolitan incident response

vehicle (MIRV), as needed, via CCD. d. Request that the MMRS-TF be activated

and designate a staging area for theme. Request an Incident Management Team, as

needed, via CCD.

The first arriving company shall establish the ____________ area and the ________ area and begin emergency decontamination of the victims

emergency decontamination, safe refuge

2019 © TIM FORDHAM304

Page 305: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Initial Actions Checklist for the First Responder

--Size-up: Location by address or intersection Incident Type: HazMat, MCI, building collapse, etc. Is it dynamic or static? Is fire involved How many victims: their signs and symptoms Special Instructions: safe approach, Staging, PPE, etc.

--Safety: PPE Weather conditions Topography Safe distances Secondary devices Consider all unknown substances lethal until proven otherwise

--First Alarm Assignments: First Arriving Company: size-up, exclusion zone, emergency

2019 © TIM FORDHAM305

Page 306: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11decontamination. Safe refuge area. Pass command. Second Arriving Company: assume command, perimeter control, command post, and water supply to first arriving company. Additional Arriving Companies: support the incident per the IC.

--Incident Objectives: Establish exclusion zone, establish IDE line, and contain victims. Establish emergency decon area with FRO officer as the emergency decon manager. Establish a safe refuge area within the exclusion zone and assign a FRO firefighter as safe refuge area manager. Communicate findings to the responding

HMTF via MDT, cell phone or through CCD.

Emergency Operations First Arriving Company Officer (3)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM306

Page 307: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. The first arriving company officer shall

conduct an initial size-up of the incident and communicate a radio size up report

2. The first arriving company shall retreat upwind, uphill, upstream, and at a safe distance. Initially, all personnel shall wear full turnouts and a SCBA

3. The first arriving company personnel shall begin emergency decon when victims appear symptomatic

Radio size up report shall include (6)a. Location by address or intersectionb. Type of incidentc. Whether the incident is dynamic or staticd. Whether fire is involvede. Estimated number of victims: their signs

and symptomsf. Special instructions

(1) Direction of approach for incoming units

(2) Safe distances for staging and future operations

(3) Appropriate PPE to be worn

2019 © TIM FORDHAM307

Page 308: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The first arriving company personnel shall

begin emergency decontamination when victims appear symptomatic (3)

a. Establish an exclusion zone and an isolate and deny entry (IDE) line to contain victims

b. Establish an emergency decontamination area large enough to encompass the number of victims and equipment needed to provide emergency decontamination. The First arriving company officer shall become the emergency decon manager after passing command

c. Establish a safe refuge area (SRA). A firefighter shall be assigned as the safe refuge area manager

The second arriving company officer shall: (5)a. Assume commandb. Establish a command post uphill, upwind,

upstream, and at a safe distancec. Establish a perimeter controld. Provide a water supply for the first arriving

companye. Provide CCD with a follow-up reportf. Anticipate the need for additional resources,

2019 © TIM FORDHAM308

Page 309: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11including outside resources, to mitigate the event according to the demands of the incident type (i.e., CBRNE)

Chemical agents dictate the immediate use of emergency and medical decontamination of multiple victims. Resources available to assist are: (5)

a. TEWb. HMTFc. MIRVd. HHMDe. MMRS-TF.

Biological Agents may or may not require the use of emergency decontamination as an initial action. Resources available in this situation are: (3)

a. TEWb. HMTFc. HHMD

Radiological and nuclear devices will not always present as such to the first responder. The first responder should look for clues in the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM309

Page 310: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11environment that may aid in the correct assessment or interview victims/witnesses as to the circumstances. Resources available to assist are: (4)

a. TEWb. HMTFc. HHMDd. Los Angeles County Health Radiation

Management

Explosive devices will present as incendiary, dissemination, or detonation devices. Resources to assist are: (5)

a. TEWb. HMTFc. Arson and Explosives Detail (AED)d. HHMDe. USAR

Indicators of possible chemical weapons (CW) usage (4)

a. Unusual incidents of dead or dying animals with a lack of insects, or insects on the ground.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM310

Page 311: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11b. Unexplained casualties (Multiple victims,

Serious illnesses) c. Unusual liquids, sprays, or vapor d. Suspicious devices/packages

Indicators of possible biological weapons (BW) usage (4)

a. Unusual incidents of sick, dead, or dying animals

b. Unusual casualties (Unusual illness for region or area)

c. Unusual liquids, sprays, or powders d. Unusual swarms of insects

2019 © TIM FORDHAM311

Page 312: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Indicators of radiological or nuclear incident. Radiological materials may present in a situation such as (4)

a. Simple radiological device (SRD), which is a deliberate act of spreading radioactive material without the use of an explosive device

b. Radiological dispersal device (RDD) or “dirty bomb”

c. Improvised nuclear device (IND), which is any device designed to cause a nuclear detonation

d. Nuclear reactor attack are considered a low probability event due to the high security

The IC shall remind all personnel to monitor their personal dosimeters and employ _____ personnel to survey the operational area with assigned radiological survey meters. ____ personnel shall respond to assist the IC on all suspicious events to confirm or rule out any radiological release

truck company, HMTF

2019 © TIM FORDHAM312

Page 313: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSED STRUCTURE INCIDENTS

If a structure collapse/explosion is suspected of having been caused by a terrorist act, one of the greatest threats to the first responder is the possible existence of _________ and ______ devices.

Secondary, tertiary

Evacuate all personnel and secure the scene a safe distance from the initial explosion site. An evacuation of a minimum distance of ____ feet in all directions, including vertically, is recommended by the AED

1000

The 2000 North America Emergency Response Guidebook (NAERG), Guide 112, warned that and explosion may throw fragments ____ meters (___ mile) or more

1600, 1

2019 © TIM FORDHAM313

Page 314: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 During explosion and collapsed structure

incidents the IC shall immediately request for (4)

a. law enforcementb. AEDc. USAR and HMTFd. Incident Management Team (IMT) and/or

MMRS-TF

During explosion and collapsed structure incidents the IC shall follow a full evaluation of ______ before ordering any personnel into the impact area.

“risk vs. gain”

During explosion and collapsed structure incidents, in general, personnel should concentrate on locating victims and rescuing those who are lightly trapped, then begin searching void spaces under the direction of USAR

During explosion and collapsed structure incidents the IC shall ensure the presence of one

2019 © TIM FORDHAM314

Page 315: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11or more RICs for the incident in the event of a secondary or tertiary device activation

Suspected terrorist-driven multi-casualty incident (MCI). After victims receive emergency decontamination, they shall then be directed to a safe refuge area, pending any further decon prior to medical evaluation by the incident medical group. The safe refuge area shall be located in the _______ near the contamination reduction zone (CRZ).

exclusion zone

2019 © TIM FORDHAM315

Page 316: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

A medical decontamination shall be employed as an interim measure to ensure decontamination effectiveness prior to evaluation of victims by the medical group. This secondary decontamination is established and operated by additional responding units in a geographical location known as the ___

CRZ

If there are ___ or less victims, the HMTF personnel can provide medical decontamination.

10

If there are more than 10 victims, the IC shall request the appropriate MCMD level of response and a MIRV.

(1) _____ victims MCMD Level 1 (2) _____victims MCMD Level 2 (3) More than 200 victims MCMD Level 3

11 to 100101 to 200

2019 © TIM FORDHAM316

Page 317: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Decontaminated victims shall be routed to the

incident medical group located in the _______Support Zone

COMMAND AND CONTROL

Management of a MCI incident shall be accomplished using a unified command approach involving (3)

a. Healthb. Firec. Law Enforcement

At the federal level, the ___________ is the lead federal investigative agency and the on-scene manager.

Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI)

Command and Control remains with the jurisdictional IC or unified command. Strategic resource coordination and the acquisition and deployment of all OA or mutual aid resources will be coordinated by the _____________

County Emergency Operations Center (EOC).

2019 © TIM FORDHAM317

Page 318: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

IMT’s may be activated to support the management of fire service activities outside the _____ and _____ zones of CBRNE incidents

Exclusion, Contamination Reduction Zone

Detailed essential elements of information (EEI) for a variety of scenarios (preplans) are contained in “Situation and Venue Specific Playbooks” developed by the TEW

The MMRS-TF will be under the direct command and control of the incident’s _________

operations section chief

The MMRS-TF will augment field medical, HazMat, and mass decon operations while providing information and liaison to incident response operations and hospitals in the OA. Coordination of the MMRS-TF shall be conducted by the ___ via CCD

TEW

2019 © TIM FORDHAM318

Page 319: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The _________________ is a specially-trained

medical response team for nuclear, biological, and chemical (NBC) terrorism. It is a Federal asset

National Medical Response Team (NMRT)

Coordination of the NMRT response shall be conducted by the ___ via CCD

TEW

MANAGING MASS FATALITIES/DECEASED DISPOSITION

Management of the decedents and their personal effects will be the responsibility of the Los Angeles County _________. However, contaminated bodies or items shall not be released to coroner personnel prior to decon.

Coroner’s Office

The _______ shall provide the official death count during any disaster

Coroner’s office

2019 © TIM FORDHAM319

Page 320: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Coroner personnel will coordinate their

activities with the IC, the_____, and/or the ___ to ensure appropriate mass fatality management.

MMRS-TFNMRT

Oversight – Regulatory oversight is required following HazMat releases. The area, facilities, and items affected by the release must be held until the _____ agency declares them fit for re-occupancy or reuse.

HHMD

All personnel who assist in remediation efforts must be properly trained and equipped per _____ regulations.

Cal-OSHA

Investigative operations shall be coordinated with the remediation effort. Coordination of investigations and remediation ensures proper evidence preservation and limits potential health and safety risks to investigators.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM320

Page 321: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 1111.10.2 – TERRORISM DEFINTIONS AND ACRONYMS 05/05/05 _______: Respiratory protection consisting of

an air tight mask employing various types of filters

Air Purifying Respirator (APR)

_______: The least penetrating type of radiation. Alpha particles are considered low risk unless inhaled or ingested

Alpha Radiation

________: An infectious and sometimes fatal disease, of warm blooded animals caused by the bacterium Bacillus anthracis

Anthrax

2019 © TIM FORDHAM321

Page 322: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

There are three forms of Anthrax contamination (3)

a. Cutaneous, or skin contact infectionb. Alimentary, or intestinal infectionc. Pulmonary, or respiratory infection

Anthrax respiratory form is most severe, leading to a ___ death rate if not treated

90%

Asphyxiation: Agents that interfere with the body’s ability to use oxygen. There are two types

a. _______ asphyxiant: Any relatively harmless chemical that displaces oxygen

b. _______ asphyxiant: Blood poisons that interfere with the body’s ability to transport oxygen

Simple, Chemical

_______: A compound used as an antidote for nerve agents

Atropine

2019 © TIM FORDHAM322

Page 323: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ______: Single celled microorganisms that

cause disease in humans, plants, or animalsBacteria

Anthrax, brucellosis, cholera, plague, Q fever, tularemia, and typhoid fever are all examples of a single celled microorganisms called ______

Bacteria

_________: A type of particle radiation that is more penetrating than alpha radiation and can damage skin tissue and harm internal organs

Beta Radiation

Biochemicals: Chemicals that make up or are produced by living organisms

___________: Living microorganisms and toxins that have been weaponized.

Biological Weapons

There are three general categories of biological weapons (3)

a. Bacteriab. Virus

2019 © TIM FORDHAM323

Page 324: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11c. Toxin

__________: Also referred to as mustard agents, are a class of chemical agents know as _______. They cause severe burns and blistering to eyes, skin, and tissue of the respiratory tract.

Blister Agentvesicants

Mustard and Lewisite are known as _______ agents

Blister

_________: Chemical asphyxiants that interferes with the body’s ability to use oxygen at the cellular level by either blocking oxygen from the blood’s hemoglobin or disrupting a cell’s ability to use oxygen

Blood Agents

Hydrogen cyanide and cyanogen chloride are common _____ agents

blood

2019 © TIM FORDHAM324

Page 325: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11B-NICE: The acronym for identifying the five categories of terrorist incidents: Biological, Nuclear, Chemical, Incendiary, and Explosives

California Terrorism Response Plan: The State’s addendum or annex to the California Master Mutual Aid Plan specific to terrorism response

CBRNE: The nationally recognized acronym to identify five general categories of agents or devices that can be used in a terrorist event (5)

a. Chemicalb. Biologicalc. Radiologicald. Nucleare. Explosive

Chemical Agents: Solid, liquid, or gas substances that have chemical properties that generate serious of lethal effects on plants, animals and humans

There are five classes of chemical agents, all of which produce incapacitation, serious injury, or death: They are

2019 © TIM FORDHAM325

Page 326: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

1. Nerve agents2. Blister Agents3. Blood Agents4. Choking Agents5. Irritating agents

Choking Agents: Chemical agents that cause physical injury to the respiratory system. In extreme cases, membranes swell and lungs become filled with fluid, which can result in asphyxiation resembling drowning

Chlorine and phosgene are examples of ____ agents

Choking

_______: The Department’s designation for a terrorism incident, suspected or actual. This designation shall bring forth an added response and notification to the TEW and other resources through Command and Control

Code "T"

Consequence Management: Planning, organizing and directing resources to protect

2019 © TIM FORDHAM326

Page 327: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11public health and safety, restore essentials government services and provide emergency relief to governments, businesses and individuals affected by the consequence of a terrorist act. The laws of the US assign primary authority to the State to respond to the consequences of terrorism; the Federal Government provides assistance as required

The _____________________ is named as the lead agency for consequence management.

Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)

Both consequence management and crisis management may operate concurrently

_________________-The area within the Contamination Reduction Zone (CRZ) where decontamination takes place. All persons shall exit the exclusion zone through the CRC as a matter of standard operating procedures

Contamination Reduction Corridor

_________: Situated between the exclusion zone and the support zone, this zone provides a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM327

Page 328: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11transition between the contaminated area and the clean area.

Contamination Reduction Zone

_________: The geographical areas established as a measure of controlling a hazardous materials incident. The three zones are commonly referred to as: the exclusion (hot) zone, the contamination reduction (warm) zone and the support (cold) zone

Control Zones

_________: The center of emergency operations for the County of Los Angeles to address response to disasters and terrorist activities in the Los Angeles County Operational Area

County Emergency Operations Center (CEOC)

___________: Planning, organizing, and directing resources to identify, anticipate, prevent, and/or resolve a threat or act of terrorism. This is predominantly a law

2019 © TIM FORDHAM328

Page 329: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11enforcement response and the FBI has been designated as the lead agency.

Crisis Management

The local FBI has defined its role as a __________ for the request and coordination of federal resources during terrorist event

“one stop shop”

________: The systematic removal of contaminants from persons and objects to reduce the effects of contamination and to prevent the possibility of cross contamination

Decontamination (DECON)

There are a number of decontamination processes depending o the circumstances

a. Emergency Decon – Employing water from a ladder pipe or hand line. Self decon 2 to 5 minutes

b. Respiratory Decon – Move to clean air environment

c. Technical Decon – Providing decon for emergency personnel in CRC by Haz Mat

d. Medical Decon – Decon through MCMD2019 © TIM FORDHAM329

Page 330: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11e. Equipment Decon

__________: A radiation detection device that can provide accumulated radiation dose.

dosimeter

__________: Referring to bacterial or viral microorganisms or toxins that cause infection or toxicity to humans

Etiological

2019 © TIM FORDHAM330

Page 331: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_________: The innermost of the three zones. Created to isolate the contaminate from the people and to keep unauthorized people away from the contaminant.

Exclusion Zone

Explosive: Substances that react violently through rapid oxidation or combustion. Agents may be classified as detonation devices with a burning rate greater than the speed of sound (3,300 feet per second) or ________ devices with a burning rate of less than the speed of sound

Deflagration

__________: Rays of pure electromagnetic energy that travel hundreds of meters and will penetrate most material. Exposures can cause skin burns and incorporation internal organs

Gamma Radiation

________: The area where victims shall receive emergency decontamination

Gross Decon Area2019 © TIM FORDHAM331

Page 332: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

________: A classification of organophosphate based chemical agents that were developed in the 1930’s. Examples are: tabun (GA), Sarin (GB), Soman (GD)

G Series Nerve Agents

_________: Any substance that poses a threat to health and the environment in the form of toxicity, flammability, or chemical reactivity/instability. They can be solids, liquids, or gases

Hazardous materials

Homeland Security Advisory System: A five level Federal alert system in a series of graduated terrorist threat conditions or “risk of terrorist attacks”

a. Low (green): Low riskb. Guarded (blue): general riskc. Elevated (yellow): significant riskd. High (orange): high riske. Severe (red): severe risk

_________: A management tool that guides the strategy and tactics of an emergency operation.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM332

Page 333: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11A basic IAP includes a clear definition of goals and objectives, time limits, and an ordered sequence of events

Incident Action Plan

Improvised Explosive Device (IED): An article or device designed to function by explosion, either by detonation or deflagration. Approximately ___ of all terrorist incidents involve IED’s

70%

_________________: An artificial line initiated by first responders to keep unauthorized persons away from victims contaminated by NBC agents to keep victims in place until an evaluation of decon. can be rendered

Isolate and Deny Entry (IDE) Line

2019 © TIM FORDHAM333

Page 334: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

_____________: The center established by and under the direction of the FBI. Located at or near the site of event, it serves as a nucleus for decision making, coordination, and overall management of ongoing operations. The JOC is an expansion of the on scene FBI command post

Joint Operations Center

__________: An inter-agency, joint terrorist task force for the Los Angeles Operational area. Coordinated by the FBI with representatives from other Federal, state and local law enforcement agencies with the goal to direct effective crisis and consequence management of a terrorist threat or event

Los Angeles Task Force on Terrorism (LATFOT)

When LATFOT, or any single agency, has specific or credible threat information warranting action, they will make warnings or disseminate that information through the _____ to the Sheriff’s EOB

2019 © TIM FORDHAM334

Page 335: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11TEW

___________: That which exceeds the capabilities of local and state resources, requiring a Federal consequence management response

Major Consequences

___________________: A motorized conveyance capable of providing materials and equipment to support a MCMD at an emergency incident, including terrorism incidents

Metropolitan Incident Response Vehicle (MIRV)

Metropolitan Medical Response System Task Force (MMRS-TF): A specific resource of the Operational Area designated to address terrorist incidents involving WMD

__________: The military system of PPE against NBC contamination. There are five levels of MOPP.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM335

Page 336: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Mission Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP)

Multi-Casualty Mass Decontamination (MCMD): A decontamination process aimed at large numbers of victims (greater than ___) from a significant destructive event, including a terrorism based incident, by employing a significant number of emergency responders and the capabilities of the MIRV

10

____________________(NIMS): Based on ICS, the National Incident Management System was authorized by the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) in 2003

National Incident Management System

______________: Specially trained medical response team for NBC terrorism that are normally a Federal asset. These teams (they number three in nation) are designed to augment the Operational Area’s Metropolitan Medical Response System Task Force (MMRS-TF)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM336

Page 337: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11National Medical Response Team (NMRT)

_________: Chemical substances of organophosphorus compounds that interfere with the body’s autonomic nervous system causing symptoms of pin point pupils, headache, and tightness in the chest.

Nerve agent

2019 © TIM FORDHAM337

Page 338: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Examples or nerve agents are: (4)SarinSomanTabunVX

___________: An event in which a terrorist threat or act is executed on a nuclear facility, or when a terrorist employs an Improvised Nuclear Device (IND)

Nuclear Incident

________: Any microorganism capable of producing serious disease or death: bacteria, viruses, and fungi

Pathogen

________: Able to be absorbed by the body through the skin

Percutaneous Agents

___________: Explosive devices of various magnitudes wrapped or impregnated with radioactive material so as to contaminate an

2019 © TIM FORDHAM338

Page 339: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11area or population with radioactivity on top of any injuries sustained from the explosive device

Radiological Dispersal Devices RDD

REM: The Roentgen Equivalent (to) Man. It is the dosage of ionizing radiation that will cause the same biological effect on humans as one roentgen of x ray or gamma ray dosage. Internationally, the unit of measure is referred to as a ______. One Sievert = 100 rem

Sievert

____________: After gross/emergency decon is rendered, the area that is deemed safe from any more contamination where victims shall be directed and held pending evaluation for further decon. or medical treatment.

Safe Refuge Area

The SRA is located in the ______ next to or near the contamination reduction zone.

exclusion zone

2019 © TIM FORDHAM339

Page 340: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 S.C.A.R.I.E. – PM: An acronym used in FRO

HazMat response that may have an application at a terrorist incident involving CBRNE:

a. S afetyb. C ommandc. A ssistanced. R escuee. I solationf. E vacuationg. P ersons responsibleh. M aterial involved

________ Threat: Prior to its activation, it is the confirmed presence of a WMD in the form of CBRNE capable of causing a destructive event.

Significant

2019 © TIM FORDHAM340

Page 341: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

S.L.U.D.G.E: An acronym to describe symptoms of victims affected by an organophosphorus compound

a. S alivationb. L acrimationc. U rinationd. D efecatione. G astrointestinal disturbancesf. E mesis

S.P.A.S.M.: An acronym to describe incident objectives at a terrorist incident:

a. Size Upb. Perimeter controlc. Action Pland. Secondary devices/Security issuese. Mass decon corridor

_____________(SEMS): Authorized by the Governor’s Office of Emergency Services (OES), it is a management system, likened to ICS

Standardized Emergency Management System

2019 © TIM FORDHAM341

Page 342: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ______: The outermost zone at a hazardous

materials incident. It is considered a clean areaSupport Zone

Terrorism: The FBI defines terrorism as “the unlawful use of force against persons or property to intimidate or coerce a government, the civilian population, or any segment thereof, in the furtherance of political or social objectives

__________: A multi agency group of specialist in health, fire, and law enforcement whose job it is to identify, analyze, and advise response agencies and the government of any terrorist activity or capability in the LA County Operational Area

Terrorism Early Warning (TEW) Group

___________(TDS): Three protective measures commonly associated with radiological emergencies.

Time, distance, and shielding

2019 © TIM FORDHAM342

Page 343: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ______: Refer to substances of natural origin

produced by, or extracted form animals, plants, or microbes that can produce harmful effects in humans. Examples include Botulinum, Ricin, and Saxitoxin that sometimes occur in edible shellfish

Toxins

TRACEM: The acronym used to identify the six types of harm one may encounter at a terrorist incident:

ThermalRadioactiveAsphyxiationChemicalEtiologicalMechanical

_______: Agents that induce blistering. Mustard and lewsite are examples

Vesicants ______: The simplest of microorganisms that

lack a system of their own metabolism. They depend on living cells to multiply and cannot

2019 © TIM FORDHAM343

Page 344: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11live long outside of a host. Examples include smallpox, and Hemorrhagic fever

Virus

_________: Nuclear material considered most suitable for a nuclear weapon

Weapons Grade Material

Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD): Any destructive device that can be classed in CBRNE and, by its design, can injure or kill people or destroy property.

APPENDIX B ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

CDC - Centers for Disease Control and Prevention CEOC - County Emergency Operations Center (L.A.) CIG - Criminal Intelligence Group(s) ECC - Emergency Coordination Center (Region I) LAPD-ATD - Los Angeles Police Department – Anti-Terrorism Division

2019 © TIM FORDHAM344

Page 345: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11LASD - Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department LATFOT - Los Angeles Task Force On Terrorism MCMD - Multi-Casualty Mass Decontamination MIRV - Metropolitan Incident Response Vehicle MMRS-TF - Metropolitan Medical Response System Task Force

11.10.3 – COLLAPSED STRUCTURE INCIDENT PROCEDURES

05/05/05 The Department’s collapsed structure response

is designed to be a multi-tiered system utilizing first responders reinforced by USAR Task Forces and other USAR technicians, as well as any other resources that would be recommended by the USAR-TF commander.

The primary objective at the scene of a collapsed structure incident is to take control of the situation by

2019 © TIM FORDHAM345

Page 346: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a. Assessing the scene for hazards including

contaminated atmospheres and secondary devices

b. Conducting searches of all involved areas c. Locating and mitigating any hazards to

personnel and victims d. Installing appropriate protective measures

as needed (e.g., shoring) e. Locating, treating, and removing victims

entrapped in the collapse f. Triaging, treating, and transporting injured

victims as they are removed from the collapse zone

g. Preventing any secondary collapse h. Preventing or extinguishing any subsequent

fires

All first alarm companies shall position apparatus outside the _____ in the event of a secondary collapse.

collapse zone

Depending on the construction type, the collapse zone may extend to the equivalent of the height of the building’s walls and, in some

2019 © TIM FORDHAM346

Page 347: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11cases, up to ___ times the height of the building’s walls.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM347

Page 348: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

EMERGENCY OPERATIONS The first arriving company officer shall conduct

an initial size-up. The size-up report shall include: (8)

a. Location by address or intersection b. Type of incident (e.g., collapsed building,

persons trapped) c. Whether fire is involved d. Type of occupancy e. Size and type of construction of buildingf. Estimated number of victimsg. Presence of additional hazards e.g., gas

leaks, electricalh. Special instructions

During a Size up use the following guide lines to describe size and type of construction building (4)

a. Light frame construction b. Heavy floor construction c. Heavy wall construction d. Pre-cast construction

2019 © TIM FORDHAM348

Page 349: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The first arriving company shall establish an

appropriate perimeter (5)a. Create an exclusion zone or an appropriate

perimeter to include safe distances from secondary devices

b. Be prepared to provide emergency decontamination of victims, if necessary

c. Establish a safe refuge area d. Pass command e. Begin the process of reconnaissance and

stabilization

The second arriving company shall: (4)a. Assume command b. Establish a command post for unified

command c. Begin perimeter control d. Provide CCD with a follow-up report

When beginning perimeter control operations, keep the front and rear of the collapse clear for _______, USAR-TF, heavy equipment, and specialized units.

truck companies

2019 © TIM FORDHAM349

Page 350: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The____ first arriving engine companies shall

be positioned to protect occupants and rescuers against the threat of fire and in a way that allows USAR units, truck companies, and heavy equipment to access the collapse area where the equipment is needed.

four

The _____ and _____ arriving engine companies shall take separate hydrants outside the affected block and position apparatus at the front of the collapse zone. Engine company personnel shall prepare to supply elevated master streams as well as a minimum of one charged hand line of sufficient length to protect the first arriving _______.

First and second, truck company

The _____ and ____ arriving engine companies shall take separate hydrants outside the affected block and position apparatus at the rear of the collapse zone. Engine company personnel shall prepare to supply elevated master streams as well as a minimum of one charged hand line of

2019 © TIM FORDHAM350

Page 351: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11sufficient length to protect the second arriving _______.

Third and fourth, truck company Highest priority, all active fire burning within

the rubble shall be extinguished to reduce the threat to any trapped victims. Protecting exposures shall be next in priority followed by extinguishments of burning vehicles.

The first arriving truck company shall position the apparatus at the ____ of the collapse zone

front

The second arriving truck company shall position the apparatus at the ___ of the collapse zone

rear

Truck personnel shall secure a water source from one of the engines positioned nearby and extend the aerial or platform to provide for rescue, exposure protection, fire attack, lookout positioning, and reach in inaccessible locations.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM351

Page 352: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 USAR apparatus, USAR trailers, HazMat

apparatus, and support equipment shall be parked in front of the collapse or at other strategic locations ______ of the collapse zone.

outside

All other vehicles and apparatus shall stage or position away from the collapse site so as to not impede access by USAR, HazMat, heavy equipment, or other specialized units requiring access to the collapse zone.

The IC shall consult with _____ officers to help determine the type and number of additional resources required.

USAR-TF

COLLAPSE ASSESSMENT ____________: occurs when one of the

supporting walls fails or when the floor joists break at one end. This type usually creates large void spaces.

LEAN-TO FLOOR COLLAPSE

2019 © TIM FORDHAM352

Page 353: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 ____________: occurs when one end of the

floor or roof section is still attached to portions of the wall, and the other end hangs unsupported. This type of collapse is extremely dangerous because of the unsupported sections.

LEAN-TO CANTILEVER COLLAPSE

____________: occurs when heavy loads cause the floor to collapse at the center. Victims trapped above the V-collapse are usually found in the bottom end of the collapse. Victims trapped below the V-collapse will be found in the void spaces away from the “V”.

V-SHAPED VOID COLLAPSE

____________: occurs when bearing walls or columns collapse, causing the upper floors to pancake down onto the floors below. Victims may be found between floors or in voids created by furniture, which support the floors.

PANCAKE COLLAPSE

____________: occurs when forces cause floor beams to fail at or near outer walls, yet still supported by interior bearing wall or walls

2019 © TIM FORDHAM353

Page 354: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11resulting in a tent or A-Frame configuration. Victims trapped above the A-Frame collapse are usually found near outside walls. Those trapped below the A-Frame will be found interiorly.

TENT or A-FRAME COLLAPSE ____________: occurs when one or more walls,

still intact, fall over like a tree. Walls may fall their full height away from the building (for safety, estimate 1 1/2 times the height.) Debris thrown from the collapsing wall may travel even further.

90° COLLAPSE

____________: occurs when brick or stone walls, one or more stories high, collapse into piles of debris that can bury victims on sidewalks and in automobiles in parking areas and along streets.

CURTAIN FALL COLLAPSE

____________: occurs when shear-walls or foundations fail, causing heavy-floor buildings to fall over sideways by their full height. These

2019 © TIM FORDHAM354

Page 355: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11structures sometimes remain intact, but are now on their sides.

OVERTURNING

____________: is the complete failure of a structural system resulting in a deconsolidated pile that is difficult to characterize.

TOTAL COLLAPSE

Impending secondary collapse recognition. Look for:

a. Walls out of plumb. b. Smoke or water movement through bricks

during fire ground operations. c. Beams pulling away from walls. d. Buckled or sagging steel beams. e. Large cracks and/or plaster falling. f. Abnormally low runoff or soggy floors

during fire ground operations.

Five stages of collapse search and rescue: A logical order of progression in the approach to a collapsed structure incident.

1. STAGE 1: Response, arrival, and reconnaissance – first responder skills

2019 © TIM FORDHAM355

Page 356: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. STAGE 2: Surface rescue – first responder

skills and USAR technician skills 3. STAGE 3: Void space search and rescue –

USAR technician skills and first responder skills

4. STAGE 4; Selected debris removal – USAR technician skills and technical specialists

5. STAGE 5: General debris removal – requires technical specialists

STAGE 1: Response, arrival, and reconnaissance – first responder skills

a. Response b. Arrival

1. Single building or entire neighborhood 2. Indications of a terrorist attack 3. Any potential for secondary device 4. Signs of impending secondary collapse 5. Assume live victims in the collapse zone

until proven otherwise 6. Resource needs 7. Consider apparatus placement 8. Consider personnel safety (L.C.E.S.) and

RIC)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM356

Page 357: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 119. Eliminate utility hazards, including water,

in the collapse zone 10. Establish equipment pools 11. Establish multi-casualty incident (MCI)

operations 12. Consider decontamination

2019 © TIM FORDHAM357

Page 358: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

c. Reconnaissance 1. Conduct an eight-sided size-up2. Establish strict scene control and security to

eliminate secondary attacks and/or secondary collapse due to uncontrolled operations

3. Begin structure triage and marking and identify likely places where live victims can be trapped

4. Identify building occupancy/use and the relation of time of day or day of week to determine the potential number of victims at the time of collapse

5. Victims6. What spontaneous operations are currently

underway and are they safe?7. Indications of a terrorist attack 8. Continually monitor for presence of hazards

such as gas/water leaks, electrical shorts, energized equipment, or secondary devices.

9. Evaluate structural stability of adjoining buildings

Conduct an eight-sided size-up (8)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM358

Page 359: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a. Sides A, B, C and Db. The roofc. The bottom or basementd. Aerial space surrounding affected building

or collapse zone to assess falling hazardse. Rotary sweep of the ground surrounding

affected building or collapse zone to assess any ground- level hazards

STAGE 2: Surface rescue – first responder skills and USAR technician skills During Stage 2 immediate rescue of surface

victims found on top of the debris, lightly buried, or entangled should be removed first

What are the five types of searches (5) during surface rescue

1. Visual search2. ‘Hail’ search – a technique to call out for

victim response immediately followed by complete silence by all rescuers to determine response and direction of any victim response

3. Physical search – controlled use of hand tools, bucket brigades, and other debris

2019 © TIM FORDHAM359

Page 360: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11removal methods to rescue victims without causing secondary collapse or crushing the victims

4. Technical search – use of search cameras, thermal imagers, and other devices

5. Canine search – use of Department or mutual aid canine teams

During Stage 2 do not move, cut, or breach any load-bearing structural member except as authorized by ______ personnel or structural engineers

USAR

During Stage 2 do not apply hose streams except when necessary to control fires to protect victims

STAGE 3: Void space search and rescue – USAR technician skills and first responder skills Exploration of ______ and other likely survival

places, reaching victims whose locations are known even if they cannot be seen or heard.

survivable void spaces

2019 © TIM FORDHAM360

Page 361: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 During Stage 3 initially, void search will consist

of calling and listening (_______), coupled with a visual search of areas that are accessible without cutting, lifting, or removing load-bearing members.

hailing

2019 © TIM FORDHAM361

Page 362: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Search for trapped victims using the “hailing system”.

1. Place rescuers in “call” and “listening” positions.

2. Eliminate all external noises (call for operational silence).

3. Going “around the clock”, each rescuer calls out or taps on something. A period of silence (and listening) should follow each call.

4. After a sound has been picked up, at least one additional “fix” should be maintained until the victim is recovered.

Paramedic medical teams shall be at hand to treat trapped victims while they are being extracted.

Breaching and shoring will require _____ technician skills

USAR

It is safer to cut holes in floors and use the “_______” approach than to breach walls.

vertical shaft2019 © TIM FORDHAM362

Page 363: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Only USAR, or other qualified personnel under the supervision of USAR, should attempt shoring. Shoring should NEVER be removed once it is in place in an unstable building.

The __ shall ensure that RICs sufficient in numbers and strategically positioned during Stage 3 operations.

IC

STAGE 4; Selected debris removal – USAR technician skills and technical specialists Prior to stage____ all accessible void spaces

have been checked and victims removed. 4

At this stage, responders will reduce the size of the debris piles, search for additional victims, or access victims that are known to be trapped below.

STAGE 5: General debris removal – requires technical specialists

2019 © TIM FORDHAM363

Page 364: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The decision to begin Stage ___ should be

made only after it has been determined that all victims have been accounted for, or that no other victims will be found alive. In many cases, Stage 5 has been reached after 15-20 days.

5

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TYPES* ___________: Materials used for construction

are generally lightweight and provide a high degree of structural flexibility to applied forces such as earthquakes, hurricanes, tornados, etc. These structures are typically constructed with skeletal structural frame system of wood or light gage steel components, which provide support to the floor or roof assemblies.

Light Frame Construction

Light Frame Construction types are wood frame structures used for residential, multiple low-rise occupancies and light commercial occupancies, up to ___ stories in height. Light gage steel frame buildings include commercial business

2019 © TIM FORDHAM364

Page 365: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11and light manufacturing occupancies and facilities.

four ____________: Structures of this type are built

utilizing cast-in-place concrete construction consisting of flat slab panel, waffle or two-way concrete slab assemblies. Pre-tensioned or post-tensioned reinforcing steel rebar or cable systems are common components for structural integrity. The vertical structure supports include integrated concrete columns, concrete enclosed or steel frame, which carry the load of all floor and roof assemblies. This type includes heavy timber construction that may use steel rods for reinforcing.

Heavy Floor Construction

Examples of this type of construction include offices, schools, apartments, hospitals, parking structures, and multi-purpose facilities. Common heights vary from single story to high-rise structures.

Heavy Floor Construction

2019 © TIM FORDHAM365

Page 366: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 _______________: Materials used for

construction are generally heavy and utilize and interdependent structural or monolithic system. These types of materials and their assemblies tend to make the structural system inherently rigid. This construction type is usually built without skeletal structural frame. It utilizes a heavy wall support and assembly system to provide support for the floors and roof assemblies. They also use an interdependent girder, column and beam system for providing lateral wall support of floors and roof assemblies.

Heavy Wall Construction

These occupancies typically include commercial, mercantile, and industrial. Other examples of this type of construction include reinforced and un-reinforced masonry (URM) buildings typically of low-rise construction, one to six stories in height, of any type of occupancy.

Heavy Wall Construction

2019 © TIM FORDHAM366

Page 367: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 _______________: Structures of this type are

built utilizing modular pre-cast concrete components that include floors, walls, columns and other subcomponents that are field connected upon placement on site. Individual concrete components utilize imbedded steel reinforcing rods and welded wire mesh for structural integrity and may have either steel beam, column or concrete framing systems utilized for the overall structural assembly and building enclosure. These structures rely on single or multi-point connections for floor and wall enclosure assembly and are a safety and operational concern during collapse operations.

Pre-Cast Construction

Examples of this type of construction include commercial, mercantile, office, and multi-use or multi-function structures including parking structures and large occupancy facilities.

Pre Cast Constructions

EXAMPLES OF SEARCH MARKINGS FOR LACo FD

2019 © TIM FORDHAMRe

367

Page 368: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 A single slash and unit identity are marked

upon entry to a structure. This indicatessearch operations are in progress within this

area The second, crossing slash shall be drawn when

all personnel exit from that structure.The following illustrations define the search

assessment marks: (2' x 2' letter "X")

STRUCTURE TRIAGE AND HAZARD MARKINGS

Make a large (2' x 2') square box with orange spray paint on the outside of the main entrance to the structure. Put the date, time, hazardous material (HM) conditions and team or company identifier outside the box on the right hand side. This information

9/12/93 1310 hrs. HM - nat. gas SMA - E-1

2019 © TIM FORDHAM

1/01/101400 hrs

2 – Live2 - Dead

RES -1 RATSLeft Quadrant: LACo FD company or team designation given at the Command Post

Top Quadrant: the time and date that the company left the structure

Bottom Quadrant: number of live and expired victims still inside the structure/area. ["0" = No Victims]

Right Quadrant: personal hazards to units/teams.

Re

368

Page 369: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11can be made with a lumber marking device.

Structure is accessible and safe for search and rescue operations. Damage is minor with little danger of further collapse.

9/12/93 1310 hrs. HM - none SMA - E-1

Structure is significantly damaged. Some areas are relatively safe, but other areas may need shoring, bracing, or removal of falling and collapse hazards.

9/12/93 1310 hrs. HM - nat. gas SMA - E-1

Structure is not safe for search or rescue operations. May be subject to sudden additional collapse. Remote search ops may proceed at significant risk. If rescue ops are undertaken, safe haven areas and rapid evacuation routes should be created.

9/12/93 1310 hrs. HM - nat. gas SMA - E-1

2019 © TIM FORDHAM369

Page 370: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Arrow located next to a marking box indicates the direction to a safe entrance into the structure, should the marking box need to be made remote from the indicated entrance.

11.10.5 – NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL CHEMICAL (NBC) AGENTS

05/05/05 It is the policy of the Los Angeles County Fire

Department to provide for the mitigation of threat and damage to life, environment and property while ensuring the safety of Department personnel.

Chemical weapons (CW): are solids, liquids, or gases that have chemical properties that produce lethal or serious effects on plants and animals. They are similar to hazardous industrial chemicals, but hundreds of times more toxic.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM370

Page 371: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Dissemination of chemical weapons can include

(3)Aerosol, Manual, covert techniques

Chemical weapons are classified according to how they affect the human body. This discussion will classify chemical weapons into five types of agents:

a. neurotoxins _________b. skin irritants _________c. chemical asphyxiants _________d. respiratory irritants __________e. antipersonnel agents __________

(nerve agents)(blister agents)(blood agents)(choking agents)(riot control agents)

NERVE AGENTS Nerve agents are organophosphorus

compounds. When used, these agents interfere with the function of the central nervous system. Death occurs from cardiopulmonary failure.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM371

Page 372: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

2019 © TIM FORDHAM372

Page 373: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Examples of these nerve agents are:Tabun (GA)Sarin (GB)Soman (GD)VX

NERVE AGENTS Common Name & Military Symbol Tabun (GA) Sarin (GB) Soman (GD) VX

Volatility/Persistence Semi-persistent Persistent Rate of Action Extremely rapid Route of Entry Respiratory and skin Odor Fruity Camphor Sulfur Symptoms Pinpoint pupils, salivation, vomiting, diarrhea, twitching, and difficulty breathing Protection Protect respiratory and skin First Aid Use Atropine and 2-Pam chloride Decontamination Remove agent and flush with soap and water or diluted bleach

Nerve agents, although not easily obtained, are considered the most toxic. A lethal dose received through skin contact (percutaneous) can cause death within ___ hours. A respiratory lethal dose can cause death in one to ten minutes.

two

Decontamination is accomplished by removal of the victim’s outer garments while flushing with water and an application of soap or diluted bleach. Personnel involved in this activity shall

2019 © TIM FORDHAM373

Page 374: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11wear a _______ chemical protective clothing (CPC) at a minimum.

Level B

BLISTER AGENTS Blister agents, also referred to as _____, are

classified as vesicants, or agents that induce blistering

mustard agents

There are three known blister agents:a) Mustard (H)b) Lewisite (L)c) Phosgene Oxime (CX)

Of the three blister agents, ______ is the easiest to produce, thus, the most likely to be encountered.

MustardBLISTER AGENTS

Common Name/Military Symbol Mustard/(H) Lewisite/(L) Phosgene Oxime/(CX) Volatility/Persistence Persistent Rate of Action Delayed Rapid Route of Entry Skin – Inhalation – Eyes Odor Garlic Geraniums Irritating Symptoms Eyes: Burning, Inhalation: Coughing, Skin: Blistering after 4-24 hours and pain Protection Protect respiratory and skin First Aid Remove from area, decontaminate, and ensure airway Decontamination Immediate – flush with soap and water

2019 © TIM FORDHAM374

Page 375: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

BLOOD AGENTS Blood agents: are chemical asphyxiants because

they interfere with the human body’s ability to use oxygen at the cellular level.

The types of blood agents for this discussion are two: (2)

a. Hydrogen Cyanide (AC)b. Cyanogen Chloride (CK).

BLOOD AGENTSCommon Name/Military Symbol Hydrogen Cyanide (AC) Cyanogen Chloride (CK) Volatility/Persistence Non-persistent Rate of Action Rapid Route of Entry Respiratory Odor Bitter almonds or peach kernels Symptoms Gulping or gasping for air, reddish skin and lips, unconsciousness, death Protection Protect respiratory and skin First Aid Remove from the area, high flow O2 by mask, antidote therapy by paramedics Decontamination Respiratory Decon, remove outer clothing, and soap and water as appropriate

CHOKING AGENTS The two principle choking agents that will be

discussed are a. Chlorine (Cl)b. Phosgene (CG)

When either of these agents comes in contact with the human body, _______ is produced

2019 © TIM FORDHAM375

Page 376: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11causing chemical burns to the body tissues (i.e., skin, eyes and lungs).

Hydrochloric Acid

CHOKING AGENTSCommon Name & Military Symbol Phosgene (CG) Chlorine (Cl) Volatility/Persistence Non-persistent Rate of Action Rapid Route of Entry Respiratory Odor Newly mown hay Strong bleach Symptoms Coughing, choking, tightness in the chest Protection Respiratory and skin First Aid Carry from area, high flow O2 Decontamination Aeration and water flush

Removing victims from the affected area accomplishes respiratory decontamination. Flushing with copious amounts of ____ will reduce the caustic affects of these chemicals on the skin. Outer garments should be removed and bagged to isolate the off-gassing effect of the chemical saturated in the clothing fibers.

water

ROIT CONTROL AGENTS Riot control agents: are generally used to

incapacitate, not to kill.a. Chloracetephenone (CN)b. Orthochlorobenzalmalonitrile (CS)c. Oleoresin Capsicum (OC)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM376

Page 377: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Roit control agents are classified as propelled aerosols or sprays. Their rate of action is rapid (within __ to __ seconds), but they are not persistent (approximately __ to __ minutes).

3-710 to 30

The usual route of entry is the eyes, respiratory system, and moist areas of the skin. Symptoms are intense pain and tearing in the eyes, coughing, tightness in the chest, and shortness of breath. Decontamination consists of removal of clothing and washing with soap and water for CN and CS cases.

Water may relieve some of the pain from an OC agent, but because an OC agent is non-water-soluble, ________ is the decontamination option for these victims.

Aeration

BIOLOGICAL WEAPONS (BW) Biological Weapons (BW): are made from

either _________ or ________. 2019 © TIM FORDHAM377

Page 378: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Microorganismsbiological toxins

________ are chemical compounds created from plants, animals, and microbes. _________ are living viruses or bacteria that can establish deadly infections in their victims. Biological weapons agents have no color, taste, or smell.

Biological toxins, Microorganisms

Most biological agents need to be inhaled or ingested to be harmful (the body’s skin provides a good protective barrier against these agents)..

All biological agents have a delayed effect: Incubation periods can range from hours, days, or weeks depending on the type of agent. The first indication that the first responder is dealing with a biological agent may be the pattern of similar symptoms observed in many infected patients at emergency rooms or when responding to calls over a period of time.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM378

Page 379: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 EMS-defined “universal precautions” should be

followed without exception (i.e., gloves, eye protection, and mask). Utilizing communicable disease kits should be considered in some cases.

MICROORGANISMS Microorganisms – bacterial agents: are single-

celled and plant-like in structure. The list includes

a. Bacillus anthracis (anthrax)b. Yersinia pestis (plague)c. Q feverd. Salmonellae

Anthrax is easily grown and can be kept almost indefinitely in the spore (dormant) form under the proper conditions. Weaponized anthrax is a very fine dust, which if inhaled, could yield as much as a ___ mortality rate.

90%

2019 © TIM FORDHAM379

Page 380: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

ANTHRAX (Bacillus anthracis) Dispersion Delivered as a dust: will contaminate environment and water Onset Symptoms appear in 1-6 days Symptoms Chest pain, cough, fatigue and fever – progresses to shortness of breath, diaphoresis, cyanosis, and death Protection Universal precautions with mask for blood and body fluid protection. Communicable disease kits Decontamination Soap and Water. Use diluted bleach, as appropriate

PNEUMONIC/BUBONIC PLAGUE – See manuals for chart and more information if interested

Q FEVER – See manuals for chart and more information if interested

SALMONELLA – See manuals for chart and more information if interested

Microorganisms – viral agents: are smaller than most bacteria and live on or within other cells, called host cells. This discussion will key on three types of viruses that may be used as weapons:

a. variola virus (smallpox)b. Venezuelan equine encephalitis (VEE)c. viral hemorrhagic fevers (VHFs).

SMALLPOX (Variola virus) Dispersion Airborne through aerosolization Onset Symptoms appear in about 12 days Symptoms Fever, vomiting, head/back ache, rash on face and extremities followed by pustules and eventual scabs. Protection Infected persons contagious up to 17 days after onset. Universal precautions, protect from body fluids

2019 © TIM FORDHAM380

Page 381: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Decontamination Soap and water

VENEZUELAN EQUINE ENCEPHALITIS – See manual for charts and more information if interested

VIRAL HEMORRHAGIC FEVER (VHF) ie, Ebola – See manual for chart and more information if interested

BIOIOLOGICAL TOXINS Toxins considered for terrorist use include

a. Botulinum Toxin (botulism),b. Staphylococcal Enterotoxin B (SEB)c. Ricin

BOTULISM – See manuals for chart and more information if interested

STAPHYLOCOCCAL ENTEROTOXIN (SEB) – See manuals for chart and more information if interested

______ is a biological toxin formed in the seed of the castor plant. There is no antidote for ___ poisoning.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM381

Page 382: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Ricin, ricin

2019 © TIM FORDHAM382

Page 383: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

RADIOLOGICAL Radiation that has enough energy to remove

electrons from any material it passes through is called ionizing radiation.

• Alpha particles

Particles that quickly lose energy and travel only 1-2 inches through air. They have limited penetrating power, and can be stopped by clothing or a sheet of paper.

• Beta particles

Particles that travel about 10-15 feet. Some beta particles can penetrate the skin. Materials such as aluminum and other metals, plastic, and glass can stop the penetrating power.

• Gamma rays

Rays that are pure electromagnetic radiation. Rays travel hundreds of meters and will penetrate most material. Intensity is reduced by heavy, dense material like steel, concrete, earth, or lead.

______ particle radiation, involving fine dusts or liquids, is considered an internal hazard, a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM383

Page 384: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11poison that can enter the body by inhalation, ingestion, or through wounds in the skin.

Alpha

___ particle’s radiation penetrating power, greater than alpha particle radiation, is considered to be both an external hazard – damaging the body’s skin and eyes – and an internal hazard if inhaled, ingested, or introduced into wounds in the skin.

Beta

______ rays are external hazards generally associated with skin contamination and the biological effects of local tissue and cutaneous irradiation with an increased probability of internal contamination.

Gamma

The Reontgen (R) measures quantity of radiation. The amount of energy deposited in any material by ionizing radiation is the radiation absorb ___, or rad. The rad represents a measure of energy absorbed per gram of material.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM384

Page 385: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

dose

The Reontgen Equivalent Man, or rem, is a unit that measures the effects of ionizing radiation on humans. This dose is expressed in ___ and _____ (1/1000 of a rem).

Rem, millirem

The average annual radiation dose received by the public is about ____ mrem (millirem). The threshold for any real consequences begins at around ___rem. A typical life-threatening dose is around ___ rem.

360, 200, 450

______ companies, HazMat task forces, and ______ officers carry radiological detection devices that will support first responders’ operations.

Truck, HHMD

Health risks associated with ionizing radiation depend on two factors: the dose and the dose rate. The dose is the total amount of radiation

2019 © TIM FORDHAM385

Page 386: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11received and the dose rate is the length of time over which the dose was received.

When first responders suspect that radioactive materials are involved at their incident, they shall use full turnout PPE, including a _______ and employ the concept of time, distance, and shielding to limit their exposure.

SCBA Distance: The dose rate varies inversely with

the square of the distance

PPE Alpha particles

FROs wearing turnout PPE with a SCBA may be appropriate. Decon. after every is a must.

Beta Particles

FROs wearing turnout PPE with a SCBA shall limit their time in the exclusion zone. A quick “in-and-out” may be a viable option. HazMat Level B protection may be sufficient for this hazard. Decontamination after every entry is a must.

Gamm FROs wearing turnout PPE with a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM386

Page 387: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a radiation

SCBA shall weigh “risk vs. gain” and enter the exclusion zone only for rescue. HazMat Level A is not sufficient for this hazard. Severely limiting the duration of exposure is the only viable defense. Because alpha and beta particles often accompany gamma rays, decontamination should be accomplished after every entry.

The types of injuries from radiation exposure are caused by external irradiation, contamination, incorporation, or a combination of all three.

External irradiation

When radiation (gamma or x-ray) passes through the body. The intensity depends on the amount of exposure to source. A victim does not become radioactive. Rescuers will not receive radiation injury from victim.

Contamination

When victim is partially or wholly covered with radioactive material. Rescuers can be cross-contaminated. Rescuers shall self-decon after decon. victims.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM387

Page 388: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Incorporation

When tissue, cells, and organs take in the radiation (e.g., radioactive Iodine seeks out the thyroid gland). If incorporation exists, then the victim is also considered contaminated. Use decontamination.

Decontamination should consist of: Firs

tLightly wet down victim to reduce the risk of contaminated materials becoming airborne or ingested.

Second

Methodically stripping off the contaminated clothing or PPE from the top down, then isolating clothing in plastic bags.

Third

Flushing any contamination from exposed skin and hair. Soap is beneficial.

Fourth

Covering victim to protect from exposure.

Radiological weapons: are simple devices that spread radioactivity by

a. covert action (simple radiological device or SRD)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM388

Page 389: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11b. accompanying explosive device

(radiological dispersal device or RDD)

______________________: is a dissemination device to deliberately expose a radioactive source, covertly, so as to irradiate persons without their knowing or to contaminate an area or the environment with radioactive particles.

Simple radiological device (SRD):

_____________________: also called a “dirty bomb”, is an explosive dispersion device using conventional explosives of various magnitude wrapped or impregnated with radioactive material

Radiological dispersal device (RDD)

When there is a suspicion or a confirmation of a device, first responders shall request response from the ____________, as well as a HazMat response. All personnel shall be on alert for any secondary or tertiary devices.

LASD Arson and Explosives Detail

2019 © TIM FORDHAM389

Page 390: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Explosive weapons (including incendiary): are

the apparent weapons of choice among terrorist groups. It is estimated that ____ of all terrorist attacks worldwide involve explosives.

70% The FBI has noted three facts regarding

explosive of weapons: a. When public safety agencies know of the

presence of a device, they have only a ___ chance of finding it before it goes off.

b. Hundreds of hoax bomb threats are reported each year.

c. Residential properties are the most common targets for bombers.

20%

Incendiary Devices consists of three basic components (3)

a. igniter or fuseb. a container or bodyc. an incendiary material or filler.

First responders shall not handle any device that is discovered prior to its ignition. Handling

2019 © TIM FORDHAM390

Page 391: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11such devices can result in its ignition and the device is critical evidence of the crime scene.

Explosive devices : are substances or articles designed to function by explosion, either by ________, with a burning rate greater than 3,300 feet per second (the speed of sound), or by ________, with the burning rate less than 3,300 feet per second.

Detonation, deflagration

Incident commanders shall ensure the presence of a __________ on an explosives incident to stand ready in the event of a secondary or tertiary device activation that may injure personnel or cause them to be trapped

rapid intervention crew (RIC)

11.10.6 – EMERGENCY DECONTAMINATION CONSIDERATIONS

05/05/05 _________________: The area within the

contamination reduction zone (CRZ) where decontamination takes place. All persons shall

2019 © TIM FORDHAM391

Page 392: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11exit the exclusion zone through the CRC as a matter of standard operating procedures.

Contamination Reduction Corridor (CRC)

________: The three zones are commonly referred to as: the exclusion (hot) zone, the contamination reduction (warm) zone, and the support (cold) zone.

Control Zones

DECON ___________: The systematic removal of

contaminants from persons and objects to reduce the effects of contamination and to prevent the possibility of cross-contamination.

Decontamination (Decon)

Emergency Decon: (a.k.a. gross decon) Employing a water stream from a ladder pipe, monitor, or hand line to provide a flushing technique with directions to victims to self-decon in the water for ____ to ___ minutes.

Two, five

2019 © TIM FORDHAM392

Page 393: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Medical Decon: Decontamination through a

_____ corridor, which assures thoroughness and evaluates effectiveness of the decontamination of civilians.

MCMD

Respiratory Decon: Directing victims to a clean air environment and providing respiratory adjuncts.

Technical Decon: Providing decontamination for ________, usually provided in the contamination reduction corridor by HazMat Task Force personnel.

emergency personnel

Emergency Decon Area: The area in the _______ where emergency decon will take place.

exclusion zone

_________________ (MCMD): A decontamination process aimed at large numbers of victims (greater than ten) from a significant destructive event, including a

2019 © TIM FORDHAM393

Page 394: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11terrorism-based incident, by employing a significant number of emergency responders (e.g., a minimum of two engine strike teams) and the capabilities of the MIRV.

Multi-Casualty Mass Decontamination

________: After gross/emergency decon is rendered, the area that is deemed safe from any more contamination where victims shall be directed and held pending evaluation for further decontamination or medical treatment. The SRA is located in the exclusion zone next to or near the contamination reduction zone.

Safe Refuge Area

Personnel assigned to the Multi-Casualty Mass Decontamination (MCMD) group shall provide necessary medical decontamination to numbers of casualties prior to those casualties entering the medical area in the_________

support zone.

The first arriving company officer engaging victims either inside or outside of the 300-foot perimeter of the affected area, persons, or

2019 © TIM FORDHAM394

Page 395: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11devices shall:

a. Provide for firefighter safetyb. Ensure that appropriate PPE is worn c. Isolate and deny entry d. Isolate and discourage exit e. Pass command to the next arriving company

outside the affected areaf. Provide CCD with an initial size-up reportg. Designate a safe refuge area within the

exclusion zoneh. Begin emergency decon in the emergency

decon areai. Offer direction and reassurance to victims.

Provide CCD with an initial size-up report including (6)

a. Location by address or intersection b. Incident type c. Whether it is dynamic or static d. Whether fire is involved e. How many victims: their signs and

symptoms f. Special instructions

When beginning emergency decon in the 2019 © TIM FORDHAM395

Page 396: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11emergency decon area use hose lines and/or elevated platforms with low-pressure fog streams to “rain” down on the victims like a shower

Wet down victims before directing them to remove their outer garments, and expect modesty to be a problem. Assure the victims that ___ of the contaminants can be removed by this simple act, and may save their life.

80%

Emergency decontaminated victims shall be directed to a ________ area

safe refuge

The second arriving company officer shall be the first unit outside the ___-foot perimeter

300

The second arriving company officer shall: a. Provide for firefighter safety b. Ensure that appropriate PPE is worn c. Assume command and follow Incident

Command System (ICS) procedures 2019 © TIM FORDHAM396

Page 397: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11d. Place the incident command post upwind,

uphill, upstream, and away at a safe distance

e. Provide first arriving company with a water supply

f. Establish unified command between health, law enforcement and fire

g. Provide perimeter control to deny entry and discourage exit

h. Establish evidence preservation and crime scene protection actions

All personnel shall consider the area a crime scene:

1. Work closely with law enforcement within unified command 2. Have law enforcement accompany fire

personnel at control points 3. All personnel will be expected to secure

evidence throughout a terrorism incident

After the initial response has been activated, and it has been determined that an expanded response with MCMD is needed the IC shall consider the following:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM397

Page 398: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11a. Size-up of the MCMD incident and

determine placement and resources neededb. Initiate a MCMD group c. Set up the MCMD corridor d. Manage the MCMD operations e. Demobilize and terminate the MCMD

operations

MCMD SIZE UPWhen estimating the size of the MCMD corridor (rule of thumb: ____ X ___)

100’, 100’

When the number of victims is 10 or less, then MCMD does not apply. The ________ shall accomplish decontamination of the victims.

HazMat task force (HMTF)

If the number of victims is between 11 and 100, then a MCMD _____ should be instituted. This shall consist of a ___ engine strike team response and a Metropolitan Incident Response Vehicle (MIRV).

Level I, Two2019 © TIM FORDHAM398

Page 399: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

If the number of victims is between ___ and ___, then a MCMD Level II should be instituted. __ engine strike teams shall respond with a MIRV.

101 and 200, Four

2019 © TIM FORDHAM399

Page 400: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

If the number of victims exceeds ____, then a MCMD Level III (a.k.a. MCMD Catastrophe) exists. Resources of a MCMD Level II shall be responded and a request for mutual aid shall be coordinated through CCD and California Region I.

200

The placement of the MCMD operations shall be in the designated contamination reduction zone, uphill and upwind of the exclusion zone. This location shall be known as the ______.

MCMD corridor

Initiation of the MCMD resources, including a MIRV, begins when the IC requests a Code-T notification and requests the resources and equipment directly from CCD.

When setting up the MCMD corridor the following shall apply:

a. Determine the proper location for the MCMD (i.e., uphill, upwind, and at a safe distance) proximal to the designated safe

2019 © TIM FORDHAM400

Page 401: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11refuge area

b. The location must accommodate apparatus, equipment, a number of personnel, and the estimated number of victims appropriate for the incident.

c. The decontamination area must also take into account an anticipated increase in the MCMD level of response.

d. Determine a water supply

The objective of the MCMD operations is to ensure appropriate decontamination is delivered to as many victims as is practical prior to directing or otherwise transferring those victims to the medical group for further triage, treatment, and transportation. Paramount in this endeavor is the safety of ALL emergency responders throughout the process.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM401

Page 402: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The MCMD group supervisor position reports

to the ____________operations section chief.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM402

Page 403: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The MCMD group supervisor position: a. Reports to the operations section chief. b. Is responsible for the implementation of the

phases of the Incident Action Plan (IAP) dealing with the decontamination of mass casualty victims.

c. Is responsible for the assignment of resources within the MCMD group.

d. Reports on the progress of the decon. operations and the status of resources within the MCMD group.

e. Directs the overall operation of the MCMD group.

The MCMD group supervisor shall: a. Identify the established control zones. b. Establish the MCMD contamination

reduction corridor (CRC). c. Ensure environmental monitoring of

contaminants. d. Conduct safety meetings with the MCMD

group. e. Participate, when requested, in the

development of the IAP. f. Ensure coordination with health officials.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM403

Page 404: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11g. Request law enforcement, as needed. h. Ensure that all patients are directed to the

medical group. i. Ensure that safe operational procedures are

followed. j. Ensure that proper personal protective

equipment is used. k. Maintain a Unit Activity Log (ICS 214).

All MCMD decon leaders positions report to the ____ group supervisor.

MCMD

All MCMD decon leaders shall: a. Carry out actions, as directed by the MCMD

group supervisor. b. Maintain communications and coordinate

operations with the safe refuge area (SRA) manager.

c. Maintain control of the movement of people and equipment within the MCMD operation, including contaminated victims.

d. Coordinate the transfer of all decontaminated patients to the medical group.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM404

Page 405: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11e. Coordinate the transfer, handling and

storage of contaminated personal effects within the CRC.

f. Ensure that safe operational procedures are followed.

g. Ensure that proper PPE is used. h. Maintain a Unit Activity Log (ICS 214).

All decon personnel shall: a) Wear white coated Tychem SL coveralls

prior to entering the assembled CRC. b) Never leave the CRC without first having

the benefit of decontamination.

Demobilizing and termination of the MCMD operations

a) Termination of the MCMD operations occurs only after a concurrence among all agencies having jurisdiction has been reached.

b) Demobilization shall begin only after the IC, in conjunction with the ________ officer has given approval to do so.

c) When the order to demobilize has been given, ____ personnel shall assist the MIRV

2019 © TIM FORDHAM405

Page 406: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11personnel in restoring unused MCMD supplies and decontaminated equipment to the vehicles as is practical.

Health HazMat Division (HHMD)MCMD

2019 © TIM FORDHAM406

Page 407: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

MCMD LAYOUT

The proper location for the MCMD (uphill, upwind, and at a safe distance) is proximal to the designated __________ area. Anticipate that a second, third and fourth MCMD corridor may be required to surround the operational area.

Safe refuge

COMBINATION ENGINE COMPANIES AND TENTS

2019 © TIM FORDHAM407

Page 408: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The success to MCMD is getting cooperation

from the victims who need decontamination. Create corridors with three engines to accommodate male, female and non-ambulatory victims requiring decontamination.

During MCMD operations attach a _______ nozzle to a _____ discharge gate on the side of the engine. Engines shall have adequate pressure (approximately 50 psi) at the discharge gates one-quarter open

2 ½” fog 2 ½”

Secure a water supply and place engines approximately ___ to ___ feet apart. All windows of engines should be closed

12 to 16

Provide modesty: install curtains by draping salvage covers over the rope from rope bags tied-off from engine to engine (dashed lines)

MCMD tent dimensions are 12’ x 12’.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM408

Page 409: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

11.10.8 – TERRORISM – CODE “T” PROCEDURES 05/05/05 The IC shall request a Code “___” notification

if, in his opinion, the situation warrants and be ready to report finding to the LACoFD _____________ representative

T, Terrorism Early Warning (TEW)

Communications between the IC and the LACOFD TEW representative shall be accomplished via landline, cellular telephone, MDT, or lastly, _____

Radio

Situations that may necessitate a Code “T” request may fall into the following (3)

a. Threatened Use – When information of a threatened use of CBRNE leads to the designation of a “decision authority” to determine a course of action

b. Confirmed Presence – A situation that may be considered a significant threat. This

2019 © TIM FORDHAM409

Page 410: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11shall also lead to a “decision authority” designation to determine a course of action

c. Actual Release – An incident that may constitute a complex emergency

In the event the IC suspects or confirms an incident to be terrorism based the IC shall (3)

a. Provide a radio size up b. Request a Code “T” notificationc. Anticipate communications form the

LACoFD TEW representative

A radio size up report should include (6)a. Location by address or intersectionb. Incident typec. Whether it is dynamic or staticd. Whether fire is involvede. How many victims; their signs and

symptomsf. Any special instructions: safe approach,

staging, PPE

Before the LACoFD TEW representative makes contact, the IC shall (3)

a. Gather as much information as is practical2019 © TIM FORDHAM410

Page 411: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11b. Take appropriate actions to protect

personnel and the publicc. Secure a landline or cellular telephone and

advise CCD of preferred communication mode

When the LACoFD TEW representative makes contact, the IC shall (4)

a. Provide a report of general scene conditionsb. Advise what resources are on scenec. Report on what actions have been takend. Seek technical assistance as necessary form

the LACoFD TEW representative

11.10.9 – CRISIS MANAGEMENT05/05/05

Crisis Management encompasses measures to identify, acquire, and plan the use of resources needed to anticipate, prevent, and/or resolve a threat or act of terrorism. This is predominately a law enforcement response and, therefore, has the ____ designated as the lead agency

FBI

2019 © TIM FORDHAM411

Page 412: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The local office of the FBI has defined its role as a “one stop shop” for the request and coordination of Federal resources during a terrorist event

The Los Angeles Task Force on Terrorism (LATFOT) is an interagency task force for the ________ Operational Area. It is coordinated by the local office of the FBI with representatives from other law enforcement agencies.

Los Angeles County

_________________ is a multi agency group of specialist in health, fire, and law enforcement whose job is to identify, analyze, and advise response agencies and the government on any terrorist activity or capability in the Los Angeles County Operational Area

Terrorism Early Warning (TEW) Group

The policy of the LACoFD is to provide for the mitigation of threat and damage to life, environment, and property while ensuring the safety of Department personnel

2019 © TIM FORDHAM412

Page 413: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The Los Angeles County Operational Area Terrorism Response and Management Plan had been prepared at the local level to affirm the following two plans

a. Terrorism Incident Annex of the Federal Response Plan – Presidential Decision Directive 39

b. State Terrorism Annex established in the California Master Mutual Aid Plan Managed by the Governor’s Office of Emergency Services (OES)

Intelligence sharing and situation monitoring is the responsibility of the TEW that is coordinated through the Los Angeles County Sheriffs Department (LASD), Emergency Operations Bureau (EOB)

Who will generally act as the point of contact for obtaining routine mutual aid for terrorist incidents

OES

2019 © TIM FORDHAM413

Page 414: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The local office of the FBI shall be notified by

theTEW of all incidents or events involving WMD when there is a/an (3)

a. Threatened Useb. Confirmed Presencec. Actual Release

Threatened Use : Requires a threat evaluation of a potential release. This review threat information leads to the designation of a “decision authority” to determine a course of action. In the case of NBC threats, the Los Angeles County Operational Area (OA) decision authority lies with the Los Angeles County Sheriff, as Director of Emergency Operations

Confirmed Presence : Requires a threat evaluation of potential release and a designation of decision authority to determine a course of action. It is essential the TEW be notified via CCD.

Incident priorities for a potential or actual terrorist incident include (5)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM414

Page 415: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Protection of life/health2. Protection of the environment3. Protection of the crime scene4. Protection of property and equipment5. Preservation of crime scene evidence

2019 © TIM FORDHAM415

Page 416: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

In the event of an actual release, the following incident objectives shall be addressed in unified command

a. Protect against secondary devicesb. Secure a perimeter and designate zones of

operationc. Rescue, decontaminate, triage, and treat

affected personsd. Avoid secondary contaminatione. Move uninvolved crowds/persons to safe

zonesf. Control and/or identify agent releaseg. Protect the crime scene and preserve crime

scene evidenceh. Stabilize the incident

11.10.11 – METROPOLITAN INCIDENT RESPONSE VEHICLE 05/05/05 Code “T”: Department’s designation for a

terrorist response. This designation shall bring forth added response and notification to the TEW Terrorism Early Warning Group

2019 © TIM FORDHAM416

Page 417: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Control Zones: The three zones are commonly

referred to as (3)a. Exclusion (hot) zoneb. Contamination reduction (warm) zonec. Support (cold) zone

____________(MIRV): A motorized conveyance capable of providing materials and equipment to support a MCMD at an emergency incident, including terrorism incidents

Metropolitan Incident Response Vehicle

_____________(MCMD): A decontamination process aimed at large numbers of victims (greater than ten) from a significant destructive event

Multi Casualty Mass Decontamination

All administrative site supervisors housing the MIRVs shall be responsible for (3)

a. The cleanliness, maintenance, and security of the MIRV

2019 © TIM FORDHAM417

Page 418: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11b. The enforcement of safety policies and

standard operating procedures regarding MIRV operations

c. The security of the entire inventory assigned to and within the MIRV’s

The Operations Bureau Deputy Chiefs’ designee will facilitate all needs regarding the MIRVs in collaboration with the _____________

Homeland Security Coordinator

When the MIRVs are included on any pre planned IAP, the IC shall ensure that ___ copies of the IAP are sent to the administrative sites at which the MIRVs are housed

2

The _____ shall be contacted immediately whenever there is a changed of status of the MIRVs and/or their equipment

Homeland Security Section

A minimum of __ personnel from the battalion responsible for the MIRV housed at an

2019 © TIM FORDHAM418

Page 419: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11administrative site in that battalion shall be assigned as attendants to the MIRVs

2

When on scene the attendants shall report to the _______ on scene

MCMD group supervisor

The MIRV shall be located in the support zone as near to the MCMD area of operation as is safe and practical

The MCMD group supervisor shall: (5)a. Ensure the safe and appropriate location of

the MIRV at the incident and supervise the attendants

b. Ensure the MCMD corridor (approx 100’ * 100’) is within the CRZ

c. Ensure the MCMD corridor provides the best flow of decontaminated victims to the Medical Group

d. Provide personnel to retrieve all equipment and supplies appropriate for MCMD Operations

2019 © TIM FORDHAM419

Page 420: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11e. Provide personnel to help the MIRV

attendants reload the MIRV after the incident

In the event of a MIRV response the IC shall (2)

a. Ensure that adequate space is allowed for the placement of the MCMD operations including the MIRV

b. Ensure appropriate numbers of emergency personnel are on scene to operate MCMD and MIRV

When a MIRV is required component of a pre plan (2)

a) A minimum of two personnel from the _________ responsible for the MIRV housed at an admin site in the battalion shall be assigned as attendants

b) The IC shall ensure that the IAP pre plan includes a staging location for the MIRV outside the OPS area

c) The IC shall ensure the pre plan includes the response of at least ___ engine company strike teams to accompany the MIRV

2019 © TIM FORDHAM420

Page 421: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Battalion, 2

MIRV attendants shall (2)a. remain with the MIRV units at all times

until the completion of the incident b. Maintain a Unit Activity Log (ICS ___) and

complete a Form ___, as required214, 662

Strike Teams assigned to the MIRV shall (3)a) Deploy the MCMD equipment and suppliesb) Erect the MCMD corridor in the CRZc) Manage decontamination operations

MIRV Incident Response Vehicle Inventory shall include (4)

a. Personal Protective Equipmentb. Communicationsc. Tents and Equipmentd. Decontamination Equipment and Supplies

11.10.12 – MULTI CASUALTY INCIDENT PROCEDURES 05/05/05

2019 © TIM FORDHAM421

Page 422: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11The Department defines a MCI as any incident generating __ to ____ casualties or more, or ____ or more Critical patients

5, 15, 5

START: Simple Triage and Rapid Treatment

2019 © TIM FORDHAM422

Page 423: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

A terrorist may use a small conventional explosive device laced with radioactive materials. In this instance, first responders will be forced to deal with four situations simultaneously (4)

a. Bomb blast injuriesb. Radioactive contaminationc. Psychological harmd. Personal contamination while performing

ones’ duties

All sworn personnel have been trained in (4)a. MCIb. HazMat FRO responsesc. USARd. MCMD

Technical/Specialist training has been given to paramedics, HazMat and USAR task forces to support first responders in their actions at a terrorism driven MCI

The first arriving company shall be responsible for providing the initial size up, initiating the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM423

Page 424: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11ICS, and taking the necessary actions appropriate for the demands of the incident

The ___ shall be responsible for the overall coordination of Department operations with command representatives from other agencies, until the emergency has ended and order has been restored

IC

The ____ group, when activated, shall be responsible for decon, and evaluation of same, prior to directing or delivering victims to the Medical Group for further triage, treatment and transportation

MCMD

The _______ shall be responsible for the appropriate triage, treatment and transportation of victims in the medical group area

Medical Group

______ shall provide complete assessment of the immediate hazard when a CBRNE agent is suspected or identified, provide the IC with

2019 © TIM FORDHAM424

Page 425: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11technical assistance, and conduct coordinate activities to minimize the effect of the hazard on life and health the environment, and property

HMTF

Who shall affect rescue in the exclusion zone when it is not practical for FRO personnel to do so

HMTF

USAR companies shall provide the IC with technical assistance and capabilities to conduct and/or coordinate activities when an explosive device or building collapse is involved

________ personnel shall provide the IC with technical assistance and authority to identify, mitigate, and remediate CBRNE hazards at scene, recommend protective actions, and evaluate the effectiveness of decontamination

Health HazMat Division (HHMD)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM425

Page 426: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

All sworn personnel shall, at a minimum, carry what two items into rescues and non-apparent HazMat incidents that may have the potential for terrorist attack.

Air purifying respirators (APR)One Mark I auto injector kit

The first responder shall begin FRO procedures involving (SIN) _________________. The first responder shall begin steps to accomplish gross/emergency decontamination of victims

SIN (Safety, Isolate and deny entry, and make proper notifications)

INITIAL RESPONSE OPERATIONS Initial response Operations for the first arriving

Company Officer (5)1. Conduct an initial size up2. Initiate an operational retreat – full turnouts

– uphill, upwind, upstream3. Begin emergency decontamination when

victims appear symptomatic

2019 © TIM FORDHAM426

Page 427: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 114. Anticipate the resource needs to mitigate

event5. MAC shall be activated through Command

and Control

The size up report should include (5)1. Location by address or intersection2. Type of incident3. Whether fire is involved4. Estimation number of victims: signs and

symptoms5. Any special instructions

When initial response personnel begin emergency decontamination

a) Establish an exclusion zone and an isolate and deny entry (IDE) line to contain victims

b) Establish an emergency decontamination area

c) Establish a ______ Safe Refuge Area

Who shall become the safe refuge area managerfirefighter

2019 © TIM FORDHAM427

Page 428: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The first priority positions critical to the success

of an MCI are (3)a. ICb. Medical Communications Coordinatorc. Triage Unit Leader

After the first priority positions have been established, the following are additional resources based on the demands to the incident

a. HMTF for hazardous materialsb. Health HazMat for hazardous materialsc. USAR for explosions/structural collapsed. MCMD engine strike teams

In the event that the first arriving company is required to begin emergency decontamination, command shall be passed to the ___________

Second arriving company officerThe first paramedic squad (PM) on scene shall: (2)

1. Establish the Medical Communications Coordinator to communicate with MAC

2. Triage Unit Leader (paramedic in charge of pt assessment)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM428

Page 429: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Medical Communication Leader shall establish communication with MAC, and provide the following info: (3)

1. Nature of Incident2. Estimate number of patients and their triage

categories3. Closest receiving hospitals (Use Form 62

Hospital Resource Availability)

The paramedic in charge of patient assessment shall assume initial triage unit responsibilities and (4)

a. Make available the Department Multi Casualty Kit

b. Develop an initial triage planc. Calculate the triage totals and inform ICd. Coordinate the movement of the patients

from the triage area, or the emergency decon area when established, to either a treatment area or a safe refuge area after emergency decon has been rendered

In the event victims are contaminated, triage shall be initiated first in the emergency decon

2019 © TIM FORDHAM429

Page 430: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11area and again after decontamination has been completed prior to treatment in the ____________

Support zone

When decontamination is necessary, patients shall be decontaminated and evaluated by (3)

a. Department personnelb. MMRS-TFc. NMRT

The IC shalla. Determine response organization levelb. Be responsible for all command and general

staff responsibilities until additional resources arrive

c. Assign positions of responsibility by priority

d. Request from CCDe. Establish Staging and check in, and assign

management to eachf. Establish an inner perimeter control and

request law enforcement to establish an outer perimeter

2019 © TIM FORDHAM430

Page 431: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The IC shall use the ___________ worksheet –

Form ___Multi-Casualty Incident Command, 59

The IC shall assign positions of responsibility by priority

a) First PriorityMedical communications coordinatorTriage Unit LeaderEmergency decon manager, when applicable

b) Second PriorityGround ambulance coordinatorTriage personnelLitter teamsMedical group supervisorTreatment unit leaderStaging managerMCMD group supervisor, when

applicable

2019 © TIM FORDHAM431

Page 432: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

c) Third PriorityCommand StaffOSCMulti casualty branch directorAir ops Branch directorPt Transportation group supervisorAir ambulance coordinatorTreatment dispatch managerTreatment managersMedical supply officerMorgue manager

The IC shall request from CCD the following (3)

a) Communication Planb) Medical cachesc) Additional resources per Form 59 MCI

worksheet

There are three main levels of triage performed in the field they are:

1. Primary- The rapid patient assessment and tagging

2019 © TIM FORDHAM432

Page 433: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 112. Secondary-The sorting of patients for

medical treatment as that treatment is available

3. Tertiary- The evaluation of the patients relevant to resources, transportation, and available medical facilities

There are four color coded triage classifications or patients, based on the severity or need for treatment during initial triage

a) Immediate (Red): Patients requiring rapid assessment and medical intervention for survival

b) Delayed (Yellow): Patients who require aid, but their injuries are less severe than immediate

c) Minor (Green): Patients who need only simple rudimentary first aid (walking wounded)

d) Deceased (Black): Those who have died or are not expected to survive even with ALS intervention. These victims are also termed expectant or non-salvageable

2019 © TIM FORDHAM433

Page 434: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 Under START, all victims who are able to walk

on their own are directed by the first responder to a designated area upwind and uphill of the hazardous area. If a chemical or radiological agent contamination is suspected, that area should be emergency decon. area and victims shall be directed to self decon before being directed to a safe refuge area

Biological agent contamination usually will not require gross decontamination

Under START, If there is no suspicion of contamination, then these victims shall be held in a safe refuge are for further assessment. These victims shall be triage tagged as _________ (Green Label)

Minor

Terrorist attacks using NBC weapons may produce great numbers of victims. Past incidents have identified many victims suffering from __________ ailments as a result of stress induced by the terrorist attack.

psychosomatic2019 © TIM FORDHAM434

Page 435: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

Psychosomatic victims should be transported to a ___________, where they can be observed by medical personnel for worsening conditions and defused by Crisis Intervention Teams

Casualty Collection Point (CCP)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM435

Page 436: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The START system should take no more than ______ minute per patient

one

The START system shall focus on three primary areas (RPM)

a) Respiratoryb) Perfusion/pulsec) Mental Status

As the responder moves through each level of assessment, any condition that is deemed immediate (red tag) stops the evaluation process. Life threatening injuries will be addressed during _____ triage

Primary

Respiratory Status: If the patient is breathing adequately, the triage personnel move on to the next step. If ventilation is inadequate, the triage personnel attempts to clear the airway by either repositioning the victim or clear debris from the patient’s mouth. If the attempts are unsuccessful, the victim is classified as follows:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM436

Page 437: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. No respiratory effort – Expectant (black tag)2. Respirations greater than __-/min or needs

help maintaining an airway – Immediate (red tag)

3. Normal respirations – Go to next step30

Perfusion and pulse: The initial evaluation is determined by measuring the patient’s capillary refill

1. Normal capillary refill: less than two seconds – proceed to next step

2. Blood return delayed: greater then two seconds – immediate (red tag)

3. If unable to obtain capillary refill evaluation due to patient color or lighting check redial pulsea) No radial pulse – immediate (red tag)b) Radial pulse is present assume BP is ___

and proceed to next step80

Neurological Status – The final assessment. Depending on the level of consciousness, the following action is taken:

2019 © TIM FORDHAM437

Page 438: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111. Unconscious – Immediate (red tag)2. Altered level of consciousness – Immediate

(red tag)3. Change in mental status – immediate (red

tag)4. Normal mental responses – Delayed

__________. Move on to the next victim(yellow tag)

ADDITIONAL TRIAGE CONSIDERATIONS Biological – Victims rarely exhibit signs and

symptoms at the time of incident

Chemical – Nerve, Mustard, Cyanide, and Choking Agents

Nerve Agents: Sarin, Soman, Tabun and VX1. Immediate (red tag)

a. A casualty who is in severe respiratory distress with spontaneous breathing or one who has been apneic for less then ____ minutes

b. Unconscious or convulsive casualties or those with major disorder of ___ or more bodily functions (SLUDGE)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM438

Page 439: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11c. Rapid intervention for these patients will

result in an improved outcome. Immediate tx should include antidote administration and bag value mask

2019 © TIM FORDHAM439

Page 440: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

2. Delayed (yellow)a. In primary triage – that which is rapid -

those not showing signs of nerve agent will be categorized as delayed in favor of those who are due to the availability of tx supplies.

b. In secondary triage mode – that which occurs at a tx area – the delayed category is assigned to pt’s recovering from exposure after treatment who are conscious and have improved respiratory status

3. Minor (green tag) – Walking and talking and possess intact breathing and circulation

4. Deceased/Expectant (black tag) casualties are those who have been apneic for more than ___ minutes, without a pulse or blood pressure

Five, Two, Five

Mustard agents1. Immediate (red tag) – For patients

exhibiting moderate to severe pulmonary distress and exhibiting chemical burns of

2019 © TIM FORDHAM440

Page 441: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11___ to ___ body surface area (BSA) and/or eye involvement

2. Delayed (yellow tag) – For most mustard agent casualties. These are casualties with chemical burns of ___ to ___ BSA or eye involvement.

3. Minor (green tag) – For those casualties with chemical burns of less the ___ BSA

4. Deceased/Expectant (black tag) For those casualties with chemical burns greater than 50% BSA and/or respiration or pulse

5% to 50%, 5% to 50%, 5%

Cyanides1. Immediate (red tag) – Casualties with

convulsions (__seconds after acute exposure), respiratory arrest (__-__ minutes after acute exposure)

2. Delayed (yellow tag) – Casualties with lower dose exposure exhibiting headaches, dizziness, nausea, vomiting and hyperventilation.

3. Minor (green tag) – Casualties exposed with no apparent signs and symptoms

2019 © TIM FORDHAM441

Page 442: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 114. Deceased/Expectant (black tag) – Casualties

that are dead after __ - __ minutes or acute exposure

30, 3-5, 6 – 10

Choking agents: phosgene and chlorine1. Immediate (red tag) – Those who develop

non cardiac pulmonary edema with ___ hours after exposure and an intensive care unit (ICU) is readily available

2. Delayed (yellow tag) – Those who develop a cough and dyspnea after __ hours of exposure. There is a chance that these patients will develop pulmonary edema

3. Minor (green tag) – Casualties exposed with no apparent signs and symptoms

4. Deceased/Expectant (black tag) – Those who develop non cardiac pulmonary edema with __ hours after exposure and an ICU is not available

Six, Six, Six

Radiological1. Immediate (red tag) – Patients with

traumatic injuries severe burns to the face 2019 © TIM FORDHAM442

Page 443: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11and upper respiratory tract and difficulty breathing due to mechanical problems

2. Delayed (yellow tag) – Victims with traumatic injuries that are not life threatening, second and third degree burns less than __ of body surface area (BSA)

3. Minor (green tag) – Victims with burns less than __ of BSA, but not involving critical areas of the body or if victim had received short term ionizing radiation of 100 to 150 radioactive absorb dose (rad)

4. Deceased/Expectant (black tag) – Victims having severe burns greater than __ of BSA. Lethal dose with signs and symptoms.

25%, 10%, 30%

2019 © TIM FORDHAM443

Page 444: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The multi casualty kit contains (4)1. 12 packets containing position vest with

responsibility cards2. I.C.S. forms with clipboards3. 50 Triage Tags4. Four 16’*20’ disposal tarps

a) RED: Immediate or criticalb) YELLOW: Delayedc) GREEN: Minor Walking woundedd) BLACK: Deceased/expectant

Each tarp is design to except ____ patients10

2019 © TIM FORDHAM444

Page 445: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 1111.10.13 – BIOLOGICAL DETECTION SYSTEM 2/08/08 Purpose is to provide Department personnel

with information and procedures on the response to a Biological Detection System (BDS) alarm activation at United States Postal Service (USPS) facilities.

Anthrax: There are three forms of contamination:

1) cutaneous or skin contact infection, resulting in black, ulcerative skin lesions

2) alimentary or intestinal infection, leading to serious flu-like symptoms

3) pulmonary or airborne (respiratory) infection, causing chest pain and shortness of breath.

The respiratory form of Anthrax is the most severe, leading to a ___% death rate within a short number of days.

90

2019 © TIM FORDHAM445

Page 446: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The United States Postal Service (USPS) has

installed (BDS) systems at postal annexes called ________

USPS Processing and Distribution Centers

2019 © TIM FORDHAM446

Page 447: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

At this time, the only biological agent detectable by the BDS is Bacillus anthracis (_____). Upon detection of anthrax, the BDS will trigger an alarm and automatically shut down the mail-processing machine. Staff alerted by the alarm will then implement their facility’s evacuation and decontamination plans

anthrax

_______________ (HAZWOPER): Employees trained and equipped to respond to, provide corrective actions, and clean-up hazardous substances

Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

_______________ (USPIS): The primary law enforcement arm of the USPS. It protects the USPS, its employees, and its customers from criminal attack.

United States Postal Inspection Service

The first arriving company is responsible for providing the initial size-up, initiating the

2019 © TIM FORDHAM447

Page 448: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11Incident Command System (ICS), and taking the necessary actions appropriate for the demands of the incident.

The Incident Commander (IC) is responsible for the overall coordination of the Incident Action Plan (IAP) and coordination with command representatives from other agencies until the emergency has ended and order has been restored.

Hazardous Materials Task Force (HMTF) personnel are responsible for providing the IC with technical assistance and coordinating activities with the ___________ teams to minimize the effect of the hazards to life, the environment, and property.

USPIS HAZWOPER

HHMD personnel are responsible for providing the IC with technical assistance and coordinating activities with the USPIS HAZWOPER teams to minimize the effect of the hazards to life, the environment, and property.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM448

Page 449: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11 The USPIS HAZWOPER teams are

responsible for entry, recon, sample collection, and sample delivery to the Laboratory Response Network (LRN) facility for testing.

The ____- agent and the ___ will be responsible for security of the postal facility.

USPIS, FBI

It is the policy of the Los Angeles County Fire Department to provide cooperative coordination with the appropriate Federal authorities at a BDS response at any of the United States Postal Service Processing and Distribution Centers (USPS P&DC). All sworn personnel shall follow standard operating procedures in Standards in Emergency Medical Services (EMS), pre-hospital care, first responder operational, emergency response to terrorism, and Multi-Casualty Mass Decontamination (MCMD) training.

When a BDS activation has occurred, Department personnel shall concentrate their efforts on: (4)

2019 © TIM FORDHAM449

Page 450: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 111) Establishing unified command with

USPS. 2) Ensuring decontamination of USPS

employees outside the facility. 3) Providing (BLS/ALS) for any persons at

the facility requiring treatment prior to medical transport.

4) Investigating and notifying the Health Department of any public exposure.

The affected USPS facility shall be treated as a crime scene and under the jurisdiction of the ___

FBI. Except for life safety issues, the FBI requires

that in the event of a BDS activation incident at a USPS facility, no entries are to be made by any Department personnel without the direction of the FBI or the USPIS officer.

The primary objective at the scene of a BDS alarm incident is to provide MCMD to the USPS employees that could number as high as ___ persons.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM450

Page 451: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11700

When a BDS alarm has been activated USPS employees are directed to notify CCD.

Upon arrival, the first-in company officer shall contact the on-site USPS representative to:

1. Confirm that a BDS alarm activation has occurred. 2. Communicate to CCD a follow-up report. 3. Establish unified command. 4. Determine the need for additional resources. 5. Locate and identify the exclusion, contamination reduction, and support zones. 6. Establish the area for decon corridors. 7. Secure the USPS civilian modesty garments. 8. Direct incoming units to the MCMD site.

All company officers shall: 1. Provide for firefighter safety. 2. Ensure that appropriate personal protective equipment is worn. 3. Support the incident appropriately per the IC.

2019 © TIM FORDHAM451

Page 452: 11 · Web viewGENERAL OPERATIONS 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Wildland Firefighting Chapter 2 – Hazardous Materials Procedures Chapter 3 – High Rise Chapter 4 – Urban

VOLUME 11

The IC shall consider the following: 1. Establish unified command with the USPS. 2. Determine the need for BLS/ALS intervention. 3. Initiate a Code T for notifications. 4. Initiate a MCMD group as needed. 5. Set up the MCMD corridor as needed. 6. Manage the MCMD operations. 7. Demobilize and terminate the MCMD operations.

Hazardous Materials response coordination will be led by the USPIS

___________ teams shall extract the evidence for LRN testing.

USPIS HAZWOPER

USPIS HAZWOPER personnel may request the Department’s ____ personnel to “back-up” their entry and/or provide responder decon.

HMTF

2019 © TIM FORDHAM452